JP5700019B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a ball-type game machine represented by a pachinko machine.

For example, as shown in Patent Document 1 below, as a launch device for a ball-type game machine, a ball for a ball game that launches a ball with a solenoid at a launch intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of a rotary operation handle. Launchers are known .

JP 2000-202094 A

In conventional gaming machines as exemplified in Patent Document 1, there is room for improvement in the method for controlling the firing intensity .

The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing a suitable launch intensity control .

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes an operation member, a first voltage dividing means having at least a first variable resistor that changes a resistance value based on an operation amount of the operation member, and And a first DC voltage supply means for supplying a DC voltage to the first voltage dividing means and generating a voltage based on the resistance of the first variable resistor in the first variable resistor. Unlike the one DC voltage supply means, a reference voltage output means for outputting a reference voltage, a reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means, and a voltage generated in the first variable resistor are respectively input. When the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is larger than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means or when it is equal to or higher than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means, a predetermined DC voltage is output. First And the voltage output means, the voltage dividing means for dividing the voltage generated in the first variable resistor, and a voltage divided by the voltage dividing means, the voltage output by said first voltage output means and synthesizing for synthesizing means, and a control means based on the output voltage output from the combining means, for controlling the radiation strength of the sphere to be fired from the firing unit.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention , there is an effect that it is possible to realize suitable control of the launch intensity .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine in the state where a front frame and a lower plate unit were opened. (A) is a perspective view of the launch unit in a state in which the opening / closing member constituting the ball feeding mechanism before the ball is arranged is opened, and (b) is a diagram illustrating the internal configuration of the ball feeding mechanism with the lid member removed. It is a perspective view of the shown launch unit. (A) is a perspective view of a launching unit in a state where an opening / closing member constituting a ball feeding mechanism in a state where a ball is arranged is opened, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an internal configuration of the ball feeding mechanism with a lid member removed. It is a perspective view of the shown launch unit. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is the block diagram which showed the electrical structure of the discharge control apparatus. It is the figure which showed the voltage change of each signal of a launch control apparatus. It is the figure which showed the change of the maximum value of the voltage applied to the firing solenoid at the time of changing the variable resistor of the addition voltage adjustment part of a launch control apparatus. It is the figure which showed the change of the maximum value of the voltage applied to a firing solenoid at the time of changing the variable resistor of the addition voltage adjustment part of a discharge control apparatus, and changing the variable resistor of a voltage fluctuation adjustment part. It is the figure which showed the timing chart of the direct current voltage applied to a firing permission signal, the firing control signal, the voltage applied to the firing solenoid, and the ball feed control signal and the ball feed solenoid. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is the figure which showed the outline | summary of various counters. It is the figure which showed the command output to the payout control apparatus from the main control apparatus. (A) is the figure which showed the arrangement | sequence of the signal pin of the connector provided in a main control apparatus, (b) is the figure which showed the arrangement | sequence of the signal pin of the connector provided in a payout control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation process performed in the main process of FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a change start process executed in the change process of FIG. 19. FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the timer interruption process. It is the flowchart which showed the start winning process performed in the timer interruption process of FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the NMI interruption process performed with the main control unit and the payout control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in a payout control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a payout control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed in the main process of FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing prize ball payout number setting processing executed in the command determination processing of FIG. 26. It is the flowchart which showed the state setting process performed in the command determination process of FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the status alerting | reporting process performed in the main process of FIG. It is the block diagram which showed the electrical structure of the discharge control apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the voltage change of each signal of the discharge control apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the change of the maximum value of the voltage applied to the firing solenoid at the time of changing the variable resistor of the voltage fluctuation adjustment part of the firing control apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the electrical structure of the pachinko machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the electrical structure of the discharge control apparatus of 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process of the pachinko machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the timer interruption process of the pachinko machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the launch control process of the pachinko machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the control signal process of the pachinko machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the content of the magnification determination table memory. It is the figure which showed the content of the offset voltage determination table memory. It is the figure which showed the change of each voltage when the discharge control process shown in FIG. 37 is performed. It is the figure which showed the change of the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to a firing solenoid, when an offset voltage is made into a positive voltage. It is the figure which showed the change of the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142, when an offset voltage is made into a negative voltage. By adjusting the variable resistor VR2 of the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is multiplied by a positive real number at a magnification smaller than 1.0 times, and the positive real number It is the figure which showed the change of the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 at the time of adjusting the variable resistor VR3 to the doubled voltage and adding an offset voltage. It is the block diagram which showed the electrical structure of the pachinko machine of 4th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the flowchart of the launch control process of the pachinko machine of 4th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the change of each voltage when the discharge control process shown in FIG. 46 is performed. By adjusting the variable resistor VR2 of the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is multiplied by a positive real number at a magnification smaller than 1.0 times, and the positive real number multiple is obtained. The change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 when the variable resistor VR3 is adjusted and the offset voltage is added to the measured voltage and the DC voltage of the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is monitored is shown. It is a figure. It is the figure which showed the content of the magnification determination table memory. It is the figure which showed the content of the magnification determination table memory. It is the figure which showed the content of the offset voltage determination table memory. It is the figure which showed the content of the offset voltage determination table memory.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) will be described with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a firing solenoid 142 (see FIG. 5) for launching a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch rail 143 for guiding the ball fired from the launch solenoid 142 to the front area of the game board 13. (Refer FIG. 5) etc. are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16. On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the firing solenoid 142 (see FIG. 5). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is used when, for example, changing the effect pattern of the variable display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect contents at the reach effect. Is operated by.

  In addition, the front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot.

  Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs. In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed. Inside the operation handle 51 is a launch solenoid 142 (see FIG. 5). A touch sensor 51a for permitting driving, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of a ball during a pressing operation, and a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 are detected by a change in electric resistance. And a variable resistor VR1 (see FIG. 8). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor VR1 changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Then, a ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor VR1 that changes according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and thereby the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. The ball is driven. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the wood screw is provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Below, the structure of the game board 13 is demonstrated.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. In addition, the opening which connects the ball | bowl guide path and game area of the front-end | tip part of the inner rail 61 to which the return ball | bowl prevention member 68 was attached is made into the launching opening 68a. The ball fired by the firing solenoid 142 is launched into the game area through the launch port 68a. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  A first symbol display device 37 provided with a plurality of LEDs 37a, which are light emitting means, and a 7-segment display 37b is disposed in the upper right portion of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of being probabilistically changing, operating in a short time, or in a normal state, indicating whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state, and the symbols corresponding to the probable big hit. Whether the symbol is a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot or an out-of-game symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighting state. The 7-segment display device 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the light emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with few LEDs by the combination of the light emission color. .

  In addition, the above-mentioned pachinko machine 10 being probable is a game state in which the jackpot probability is increased and it is easy to shift to the special game state. Further, during the probability change in the present embodiment, the game is in a state where the hit probability of the second symbol is increased and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. In addition, the time when the pachinko machine 10 is short-running is a game state in which it is easy for a ball to easily enter the first entrance 64 by increasing only the hit probability of the second symbol without changing the jackpot probability. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state, it is a game state in which neither the probability change nor the time is short (the state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased). It should be noted that, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the time for opening the electric accessory (not shown) associated with the first entrance 64 and the number of times the electric accessory is released per hit are changed. It is good as a thing.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 includes a third symbol display device 81 configured with a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that displays the third symbol in a variable manner with a winning at the first entrance 64 as a trigger. And a second symbol display device 82 composed of a light emitting diode (hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) for variably displaying the second symbol with the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 as a trigger. .

  The display content of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later, and for example, three symbol sequences of left, middle and right are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Further, in the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the variable display device unit 80 surrounds the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81 so as to surround the center frame. 86 is arranged. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. The decorative display according to is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  In addition, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 until the stop symbol (any one of the probable jackpot symbol, the normal jackpot symbol, or the off symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The number of entered balls is held up to 4 times, and the number of held times is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and the number of lights of the holding lamp 85. Four hold lamps 85 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holds, and are arranged symmetrically above the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the winning at the first entrance 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum holding number is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the hold lamp 85 is deleted, and the number of times the variable display is held based on the winning at the first entrance 64 is numerically held in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is held. You may make it display in a different aspect (for example, a color and a lighting pattern) by the frequency | count. In addition, since the number of times of holding is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the holding lamp 85 may not perform lighting display.

  The second symbol display device 82 includes a second symbol display unit 83 and a holding lamp 84, and each time the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the display unit 83 displays a display symbol (second symbol). The “○” symbol and the “×” symbol are alternately lit and displayed in a variable manner. When the fluctuation display stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the symbol “O”) The 1 entrance 64 is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time. The number of passes through the second entrance 67 of the sphere is suspended up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of suspensions is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and is also lit on the hold lamp 84. The second symbol variation display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the display unit 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. A part of 81 may be used. Similarly, the hold lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the second entrance 67 is not limited to 4 times as in the case of the 1st entrance 64, and is not limited to 4 times, or 3 times or less (for example, (8 times). In addition, since the number of times of holding is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the holding lamp 84 may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 performs a lottery lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. The first entrance 64 is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main control device 110 is a big hit, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to become a big hit stop symbol, The stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 16 times (16 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening A special gaming state is defined as a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball 65 is opened into the specific winning port 65a. You may make it form.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through an out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 7). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the firing control device 112 has an operation knob 122a of the variable resistor VR2 (see FIG. 8) and an operation knob 122b of the variable resistor VR3 (see FIG. 8). A RAM erase switch 123 is provided in the power supply device 115. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, in order to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 7). The operation knob 122a of the variable resistor VR2 and the operation knob 122b of the variable resistor VR3 are operated to adjust the firing strength of the sphere fired by the firing solenoid 142. The RAM erase switch 123 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the internal configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 in a state where the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15 are opened.

  The pachinko machine 10 is provided with an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell thereof, and an inner frame 12 is supported to the outer frame 11 so as to be opened and closed. In the game hall, the outer peripheral surface of the outer frame 11 is fixed to an installation location called an island of the game hall. Since the inner frame 12, the front frame 14, and the lower dish unit 15 are configured to be openable to the front side with respect to the outer frame 11, the inner frame 12, the front frame 14, and the lower dish unit 15 are not touched from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Inspection and adjustment are performed with the inner frame 12 and the like open to the front side with respect to the outer frame 11.

  In order to support the inner frame 12, metal upper hinges (not shown) and lower hinges (not shown) are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front. The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable with the side on which the upper and lower hinges are provided as an opening / closing axis.

  The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of an ABS resin-made inner frame base 52 formed in a rectangular shape, and a substantially circular central window 52 a is formed at the center of the inner frame base 52. A mounting portion for the game board 13 is provided on the back side of the inner frame base 52, and the game board 13 is detachably mounted.

  The lower side of the central window 52a of the inner frame base 52 is formed in a concave shape with the front side open, and a flat mounting surface 52b is formed on the back side. The mounting surface 52b is attached with a launch unit 140 for launching a ball to the front surface of the game board 13, a passage forming member 53 that forms a passage for discharging the ball to the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 50, and the like.

  Next, the firing unit 140 that is attached to the lower part on the front side of the inner frame base 52 and constitutes a part of the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIG. 5 shows a state before the ball G1 is arranged on the front surface of the cap 142b that covers the tip of the plunger 142a of the firing solenoid 142, with the ball G1 held by the delivery member 155 of the ball feed mechanism 144. FIG. Yes.

  FIG. 5A is a perspective view of the launch unit 140 in a state in which the opening / closing member 152 constituting the ball feeding mechanism 144 is opened, and FIG. 5B is a diagram illustrating the lid member 153 in the state of FIG. FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the firing unit 144 showing the internal configuration of the ball feeding mechanism 144 removed.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the firing unit 140 includes a base plate 141 that is fixed to a mounting surface 52b (see FIG. 4) below the inner frame base 52 with a screw, and a firing solenoid 142 that is attached to the base plate 141. The firing solenoid 143 is mounted on and fixed to the base plate 141 so as to extend parallel to the longitudinal direction of the firing solenoid 142 on one end side of the firing solenoid 142, and the base end of the firing rail 143 (the firing solenoid). 142 is attached to the base plate 141 so as to support and position the ball placed on the base end portion of the launch rail 143. Positioning member 145.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the base plate 141 is formed by pressing a metal flat plate such as a zinc alloy, and is in close contact with the mounting surface 52b of the inner frame base 52 with screws. Fixed. The firing rail 143 guides the ball immediately after being fired by the firing solenoid 142, and is a boss (not shown) fixed to the base plate 141 so as to extend linearly while maintaining a predetermined firing angle (launch angle). )) With screws (not shown). A ball fired in accordance with the turning operation of the operation handle 51 is launched obliquely upward along the launch rail 143 and guided to the game area.

  Here, in this pachinko machine 10, as a launching device for launching a sphere, a single unit solenoid (launching) in which a linear solenoid is housed in a case member is used instead of a conventionally used combination of a motor and a launcher. A solenoid 142) is employed. The firing solenoid 142 is provided with a metal plunger 142a disposed in parallel with the firing rail 143 in the longitudinal direction, and a resin cap 142b covering the tip of the plunger 142a. As a material for the cap 142b, a polyester-based thermoplastic elastomer is employed in the present embodiment. While the player is turning the operation handle 51 (while the touch center 51a is on and the stop switch 51b is off), the firing solenoid 142 repeats excitation and de-excitation every predetermined time. Corresponding to this, the plunger 142a is repeatedly projected and retracted. When the plunger 142a protrudes, the sphere positioned on the firing rail 143 by the positioning member 145 is launched toward an obliquely upward direction toward the firing rail 143. A variable resistor VR1 that is linked to the operation handle 51 is electrically connected to the firing solenoid 142, and the protruding speed of the plunger 142a is adjusted based on the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 (the stroke amount is substantially constant). ), The firing speed of the sphere, and thus the jump amount, is adjusted by the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51.

  The firing solenoid 142 is fixed by attaching a bolt (not shown) and a nut 148 to a pair of bosses (not shown) and a bolt 141b that are erected on the base plate 141, respectively. In the ball launch unit 140, the height of the launch solenoid 142 with respect to the base plate 141 is made different by adjusting the tightening of the bolts and nuts 148 provided above and below the launch solenoid 142 so that the plunger 142a and the launch rail 143 are relatively positioned. The mounting position of the ball can be adjusted and the hitting point of the ball can be adjusted. Even when there are variations in manufacturing and assembling of each part during the manufacture of the pachinko machine 10, the ball launch unit 140 is assembled to the pachinko machine 10 and then the bolts and nuts 148 are adjusted to finely adjust the flying amount of the ball. be able to. Further, the firing solenoid 142 is entirely disposed inside the outer peripheral edge of the base plate 141, and when the ball launching unit 140 is assembled to the inner frame base 52 from the base plate 141 side, the firing solenoid 142 is another component. It is prevented from being caught and damaged.

  The positioning member 145 is a member for supporting the ball placed on the right end portion (base end portion) of the firing rail 143 and positioning the ball at the striking position, and the firing rail 143 is provided from the base plate 141. It is formed to protrude in a cylindrical shape on the surface side. The positioning member 145 is provided with a fastening hole penetrating along the axial direction, and the positioning member 145 is screwed to the base plate 141 by inserting a screw into the fastening hole. Here, the fastening hole of the positioning member 145 is formed not at the center of the columnar shape but at an eccentric position. For this reason, by rotating the positioning member 145 appropriately and then tightening the screw, the striking position of the ball placed on the firing rail 143 can be slightly changed, and at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 10 and after the manufacturing. It is possible to easily adjust the flying amount of the ball.

  The ball feeding mechanism 144 feeds the balls continuously guided from the upper plate 17 one by one to the base end portion of the firing rail 143. The ball feed mechanism 144 includes a resin pedestal member 151 fixed to the base plate 141 so as to cover the upper portion of the firing solenoid 142, and a resin that is pivotally supported on one side of the pedestal member 151 and can be opened and closed. And an opening / closing member 152 made of a metal. A locking claw 151a is integrally formed on the pedestal member 151 toward the front side where the opening / closing member 152 is provided. The locking claw 151a is formed on the opening / closing member 152 in a closed state overlapping the front surface of the pedestal member 151. A locking hole 152a is formed in which is caught. Normally, the opening / closing member 152 is in a closed state in which one side is pivotally supported by the pedestal member 151 and the other side is locked to the pedestal member 151 by the locking hole 152a and overlaps the front surface of the pedestal member 151. This closed state is released by removing the locking claw 151 a of the base member 151 from the locking hole 152 a of the opening / closing member 152, and the opening / closing member 152 can be opened forward with respect to the base member 151. Further, the opening / closing member 152 is slid upward to be removable from the pedestal member 151 by being opened to the maximum with respect to the pedestal member 151.

  On the front surface of the opening / closing member 152, an introduction port 152b for introducing a sphere guided from the upper plate 17 is provided at the left end of the front view. Is done. A lid member 153 is detachably attached to the back side of the opening / closing member 152, and the ball feed solenoid 154 and the delivery member 155 are covered with the lid member 153. The ball feed solenoid 154 and the delivery member 155 are members that operate to send out the balls one by one, and as shown in FIG. Are arranged side by side with the upper side facing up.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, the delivery member 155 is a resin member that is pivotally supported by a pin so that one side of the introduction port 152b can swing up and down with respect to the opening / closing member 152. A holder portion 155a is provided on one side to be recessed so that only one sphere can be accommodated. Further, a metal piece 156 is attached to the upper side portion connecting the shaft portion through which the pin is inserted and the holder portion 155a so as to face the ball feed solenoid 154.

  When the ball feed solenoid 154 is turned on (excited), the metal piece 156 is pulled by the magnetic force of the ball feed solenoid 154, and the feed member 155 rotates upward. Thereby, it will be in the state in which a ball | bowl is accommodated in the holder part 155a. When spheres are continuously introduced from the introduction port 152b, the leading sphere G1 is accommodated in the holder portion 155a and the vertical movement is restricted, and the subsequent sphere G2 is supported by the sphere accommodated in the holder portion 155a. The flow is regulated.

  Next, the ball feeding operation of the ball G1 by the ball feeding mechanism 144 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 shows a state in which the sphere G1 flows down from the delivery member 155 of the ball feed mechanism 144 and the sphere G1 is arranged on the front surface of the cap 142b that covers the tip of the plunger 142a of the firing solenoid 142.

  FIG. 6A is a perspective view of the launch unit 140 in a state where the opening / closing member 152 constituting the ball feeding mechanism 144 is opened, and FIG. 6B is a view illustrating the lid member 153 in the state of FIG. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the launch unit 140 showing the internal configuration of the ball feeding mechanism 144 that has been removed.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, when the ball feed solenoid 154 is turned off (de-energized) in a state where the ball G1 is accommodated in the holder portion 155a (see FIG. 5), the delivery member 155 rotates downward by its own weight. Then, the sphere G1 accommodated in the holder portion 155a flows down. At this time, since the transition of the succeeding sphere G2 to the holder portion 155a is restricted by the upper side of the delivery member 155, only the sphere G1 accommodated in the holder portion 155a is sent downward by the vertical movement of the delivery member 155. As shown in FIGS. 6 (a) and 6 (b), the sphere G1 sent out downward passes through a delivery port 152c (see FIG. 5 (a)) formed by an opening / closing member 152 and a lid member 153. Then, it is guided onto the firing rail 143. Then, the sphere G1 guided on the firing rail 143 rolls to the base end portion of the firing rail 143 by the weight of the sphere G1, and is disposed on the front surface of the cap 142b that covers the distal end of the plunger 142a of the firing solenoid 142. For this reason, when the ball feed solenoid 154 is repeatedly turned on (excited) and turned off (de-energized), the balls are placed one by one on the front surface of the cap 142b covering the tip of the plunger 142a of the firing solenoid 142 in synchronization with the repetition. The ball disposed on the front surface of the cap 142b covering the tip of the plunger 142a of the firing solenoid 142 is fired one by one toward the game area by turning on and off the firing solenoid 142 in synchronization with the on / off of the ball feed solenoid 154. can do.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are sent from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the operation to a peripheral control device (sub control device) such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113. However, such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and the work area (work area for storing various flags and counters, I / O values, etc. Area). The RAM 203 is configured to be able to hold (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is connected to the payout control device 111 via the connectors 207 and 217 and the sound lamp control device 113 via the connectors 208 and 228, respectively. In addition, the input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 206 including a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 82, a firing control device 112, an external output terminal plate 261, a switch group and a sensor group not shown. ing. A hall computer 262 can be connected to the external output terminal plate 261, and data or the like can be output from the main controller 110 to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal plate 261.

  When the main controller 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball, the firing control device 112 is configured to place a ball on the front surface of the cap 142b (see FIG. 5) that covers the tip of the plunger 142a of the firing solenoid 142. In addition to controlling 154, the firing solenoid 142 is controlled so that the launching strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained. The firing solenoid 142 and the ball feed solenoid 154 are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met.

  Specifically, the payout control is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). A firing permission signal SG3 is input from the signal conversion circuit 241 of the substrate 111 to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110. When the launch permission signal SG 3 is input to the input / output port 205, the MPU 201 outputs the launch control signal α and the ball feed control signal β from the input / output port 205 to the launch control device 112. When the firing control signal α is input to the firing control device 112, a voltage is supplied to the firing solenoid 142, and the firing solenoid 142 turns a ball previously disposed on the front surface of the firing solenoid 142 to turn the operation handle 51. Fire towards the game area with strength according to the. When the ball feed control signal β is input to the firing control device 112, a voltage is supplied to the ball feed solenoid 154, and the ball feed solenoid 154 in the ball feed mechanism 144 feeds only one ball and the ball is fed. The sphere is placed in front of the firing solenoid 142.

  Here, the firing permission signal SG3 will be described. The launch permission signal SG3 is a signal output from the signal conversion circuit 241 in the payout control device 111 to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110. The signal conversion circuit 241 that outputs the firing control signal SG3 mainly includes an AND circuit that is a logic circuit. The firing permission signal SG3 is turned on only when the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the stop switch 51b is turned off, and is turned off when any of the sensors does not satisfy the above condition. When the player rotates the operation handle 51 with the intention of launching, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the stop switch 51b is turned off. In a state where the 51 rotation operation is performed, a ball is launched by the firing solenoid 142.

  Although the details will be described with reference to FIG. 12, the firing of the ball of the firing solenoid 142 and the placement of the ball on the front surface of the firing solenoid 142 performed by the ball feeding solenoid 154 in the ball feeding mechanism 144 may not be performed at the same time. It is configured.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up.

  In the work area of the RAM 213, a total prize ball number memory 213a, an upper command storage buffer 213b, a payout error flag 213c, and a payout permission flag 213d are provided.

  The total prize ball number memory 213a is a memory for storing the total number of unpaid prize balls to be paid out by the payout control device 111. A ball that has been driven into the game area wins one of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, and when this is detected by the main control device 110, a payout of the number of prize balls according to the winning is a prize ball command. (See FIG. 15), the main controller 110 instructs the payout controller 111. In the total prize ball number memory 213a, the number of payout of prize balls designated by the prize ball command is added and stored. If the value of the total prize ball number memory 213a is not 0, the prize ball is paid out, and the value is decremented by 1 every time one prize ball is detected. The payout of prize balls is performed until the value of the total prize ball number memory 213a becomes zero.

  The upper command storage buffer 213b is a buffer for storing an upper command (first byte command) among the 2-byte commands output from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111 shown in FIG. The main controller 110 outputs a payout return command, a payout initialization command, and 15 types of prize ball commands to the payout control device 111. These upper commands (99H) are output to the upper command storage buffer 213b. , AAH, F0H to FEH) are stored. The contents of the upper command storage buffer 213b are cleared to 0 when a lower command (second byte command) is input.

  The payout error flag 213c is a flag that is turned on when the payout control device 111 cannot normally input the 2-byte command output from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111 shown in FIG. When the payout error flag 213c is turned on, a character “C” is displayed on the 7-segment LED 121 by the state notification process (S906 in FIGS. 25 and 29), and the occurrence of a command error is notified. The payout error flag 213c once turned on is turned off when a normal command of 2 bytes is input. When the payout error flag 213c is turned off, the error display of the 7 segment LED 121 is also canceled.

  The payout permission flag 213d is a flag for permitting the payout of the winning ball or the loaned ball, and is turned off in the start-up process (S808, S811, S812 in FIG. 24), but is normal output from the main control device 110. Is turned on when a command (such as a payout initialization command, a payout power recovery command, or a prize ball command) is input. That is, the payout permission flag 213d is a flag for confirming that the main control device 110 is up.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110 is connected to the input / output port 215 via connectors 207 and 217, and a 7-segment LED 121, a payout motor 216, an external output terminal plate 261, and the like are connected to each other. The payout control device 111 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 241. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out is connected. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The 7-segment LED 121 is a display (display means) for notifying the state of the payout control device 111. When the payout control device 111 inputs a command output from the main control device 110, and it is determined that the command is an unspecified command (invalid command), the 7-segment LED 121 causes the character “C” to be displayed. Displayed to notify the occurrence of a command error. In addition, a hall computer 262 can be connected to the external output terminal plate 261, and data or the like can be output from the payout control device 111 to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal plate 261. Errors generated in the payout control device 111 can also be output to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal board 262.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs light on and off in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34), and the display control device 114. The setting of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display device 81 performed in is controlled. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110 is connected to the input / output port 225 via connectors 208 and 228, and the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The display control device 114 controls the change display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a ROM (program ROM) 232, a work RAM 233, a video RAM 234, a character ROM 235, an image controller 236, an input port 237, an output port 238, and bus lines 239 and 240. It has. The input side of the input port 237 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 237 is connected to the MPU 231, ROM 232, work RAM 233, and image controller 236. A video RAM 234 and a character ROM 235 are connected to the image controller 236, and an output port 238 is connected via a bus line 240. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 238. Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different winning probability for winning the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot, there is a model having the same specifications as the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common part to reduce the cost.

  The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the symbol display command input from the sound lamp control device 113. The ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various programs. The character ROM 235 is a memory that stores data for effects such as symbols (background symbols and third symbols) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The video RAM 234 is a memory for storing effect data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the display content of the third symbol display device 81 is changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 234.

  The image controller 236 adjusts the timing of the MPU 231, the video RAM 234, and the output port 238 to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads display data stored in the video RAM 234 at a predetermined timing to read the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure and the like, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 having a RAM erase switch 123. ing. The power supply unit 251 supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches, solenoids, motors, etc. 12 volts, logic 5 volts, RAM A backup voltage or the like for backup is generated, and a necessary voltage is supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like using the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 VDC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown) occurs when this voltage is less than 22 volts, Power failure signal SG1 is output to main controller 110 and payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Accordingly, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit that outputs a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 123 is pressed. When the RAM control signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data (contents of the RAM 203).

  Next, the firing control device 112 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the launch control device 112. The firing control device 112 includes a voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301, an addition voltage adjustment unit 302, an addition circuit unit 303, a voltage supply unit 304, a firing solenoid control unit 305, and a ball feed solenoid control unit 306. Has been.

  The voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 is a circuit that divides a DC voltage (signal SA1) generated in the variable resistor VR1 in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and includes an operational amplifier OP1 and a variable resistor whose resistance value is variable. And VR2. Here, the resistance value of the variable resistor VR2 can be adjusted by the operation knob 122a (see FIG. 3).

  The plus input terminal (non-inversion input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP1 which is the input side of the power supply fluctuation adjustment unit 301 is connected to a variable resistor VR1 that detects the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance.

  Note that a 5-volt DC power source DC1 is connected to one end of the variable resistor VR1, and the other end of the variable resistor VR1 is grounded. This is because the resistance value of the variable resistor VR1 changes according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, a DC voltage corresponding to the change in the resistance value is generated in the variable resistor VR1, and the generated DC voltage ( This is because the signal SA1) is input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP1.

  The negative input terminal (inverted input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP1 is short-circuited with the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP1, and the output of the operational amplifier OP1 is directly fed back to the negative input terminal of the operational amplifier OP1. Therefore, the operational amplifier OP1 is used as a buffer circuit that outputs a DC voltage input from the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP1 to the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP1 with an amplification factor of approximately 1.

  One end of the variable resistor VR2 is connected in series to the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP1, and the other end of the variable resistor VR2 is grounded. Therefore, the DC voltage (signal SA1) input from the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP1 is output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP1 with an amplification factor of approximately 1, and the output DC voltage is variable. The voltage is divided by the resistor VR2. The divided DC voltage is input to the resistor R2 of the adding circuit unit 303. Note that the DC voltage (signal SB1) generated in the variable resistor VR2 can be adjusted by adjusting the resistance value of the variable resistor VR2 with the operation knob 122a (see FIG. 3).

  In addition, the direct current voltage (signal SB1) generated in the variable resistor VR2 reduces the fluctuation range of the direct current voltage (signal SA1) generated in the variable resistor VR1 in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, thereby playing the game It is possible to adjust the range and the range width of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51, which is the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the region. However, since the DC voltage (signal SB1) generated in the variable resistor VR2 is divided by the variable resistor VR2 from the DC voltage (signal SA1) generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51, the variable resistor VR1. Is smaller than the DC voltage (signal SA1) generated at (see signal SB1 in FIG. 9). This reduced voltage can be compensated for by a DC voltage input from the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 described below to the addition circuit unit 303.

  The addition voltage adjustment unit 302 is a circuit that generates a constant DC voltage, a 12-volt DC power supply DC2, a resistor R1 having a fixed resistance value, a variable resistor VR3 having a variable resistance value, a Zener It is constituted by a diode D1 and a capacitor CD1. Here, the resistance value of the variable resistor VR3 can be adjusted by the operation knob 122b (see FIG. 3).

  The other end of the variable resistor VR3 is grounded, and one end of the variable resistor VR3 is connected to the cathode of the Zener diode D1, one end of the capacitor CD1, and one end of the resistor R1. Since the anode of the Zener diode D1 is grounded, the Zener diode D1 and the variable resistor VR3 are connected in parallel. Further, since the other end of the capacitor CD1 is grounded, the capacitor CD1 and the variable resistor VR3 are connected in parallel like the Zener diode D1. Therefore, the capacitor CD1, the Zener diode D1, and the variable resistor VR3 form a parallel circuit. The other end of the resistor R1 is connected to a 12-volt DC power source DC2. The Zener diode D1 is used to stabilize the constant voltage generated in the Zener diode D1 in order to set the DC voltage generated in the Zener diode D1 to a constant value (constant voltage). The resistor R1 is used to limit the current supplied from the 12-volt DC power supply DC2.

  The 12-volt DC voltage supplied from the 12-volt DC power source DC2 is divided by the resistor R1, the parallel circuit of the capacitor CD1, the Zener diode D1, and the variable resistor VR3. The constant DC voltage (zener voltage) generated in the Zener diode D1 is also generated in the variable resistor VR3 connected in parallel with the Zener diode D1. Here, by adjusting the resistance value of the variable resistor VR3 with the operation knob 122b (see FIG. 3), the DC voltage output from the variable resistor VR3 can be adjusted with a voltage equal to or lower than the Zener voltage. Note that the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 is input to the resistor R3 of the adder circuit unit 303. Here, by inputting the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 to the resistor R3 of the adder circuit unit 303, the range width of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51, which becomes the firing strength at which the ball is shot into the game area, is changed. In this case, only the range can be adjusted (see the signal SC1 in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10). Therefore, the DC voltage (signal SB1) generated in the variable resistor VR2 is divided by dividing the DC voltage (signal SA1) generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301. Even if the voltage becomes smaller than the DC voltage (signal SA1) generated in the variable resistor VR1, this reduced voltage can be compensated by the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3.

  Since the DC voltage supplied from the 12-volt DC power supply DC2 is made constant by using the Zener diode D1, the DC voltage supplied from the 12-volt DC power supply DC2 becomes unstable and the DC voltage changes. In this case, the DC voltage generated in the Zener diode D1 becomes a stable constant value (constant voltage). Therefore, a stable constant voltage is generated also in the variable resistor VR3 connected in parallel to the Zener diode D1, so that the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 also becomes a stable constant voltage.

  The adding circuit unit 303 adds (adds) the DC voltage (signal SB1) generated in the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 and the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 of the adding voltage adjusting unit 302. And a circuit for outputting, and is configured by resistors R2, R3, R4, R5 having fixed resistance values and an operational amplifier OP2.

  The variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 is connected to one end of the resistor R2, and the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjusting unit 302 is connected to one end of the resistor R3. Here, the resistance values of the resistors R2, R3, R4, and R5 are all the same, and the other end of the resistor R2 and the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP2 are connected to the other end of the resistor R3. ing. The negative input terminal (inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP2 is connected to one end of the resistor R4 and one end of the resistor R5. The other end of the resistor R4 is the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP2 and the other end of the resistor R5. Is grounded.

  Therefore, the circuit composed of the resistors R2, R3, R4, and R5 and the operational amplifier OP2 receives a DC voltage (signal SB1) input from one end of the resistor R2 (generated in the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301). And a DC voltage input from one end of the resistor R3 (generated in the variable resistor VR3 of the added voltage adjusting unit 302) is added (added) to function as an adder circuit that outputs from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP2. To do. The DC voltage output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP2 is input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the voltage supply unit 304.

  The voltage supply unit 304 is a circuit that supplies a voltage to the firing solenoid 142, and includes an operational amplifier OP3, a low-pass filter F1, a DC-DC converter CV1 that is a booster, a DC power source DC3 that supplies a DC voltage of 32 volts, And a capacitor CD2. Since the negative input terminal (inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 and the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP3 are short-circuited, the operational amplifier OP3 functions as a buffer amplifier. The positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 is connected to the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP2 of the adder circuit unit 303. Therefore, the DC voltage generated at the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP2 of the adder circuit unit 303 is input from the positive input terminal of the operational amplifier OP3, has an amplification factor of approximately 1, and is output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP3.

  The output terminal of the operational amplifier OP3 is connected to the input terminal of the low-pass filter F1, and the low-pass filter F1 reduces noise (high-frequency component) superimposed on the DC voltage output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP3. The output terminal of the low-pass filter F1 is connected to the input terminal of the DC-DC converter CV1, and further, the DC-DC converter CV1 is connected to a DC power supply DC3 that supplies a DC voltage of 32 volts, and the DC A DC voltage of 32 volts is supplied from the power source DC3 to the DC-DC converter CV1. Therefore, the DC voltage (signal SC1) output from the output terminal of the low-pass filter F1 is boosted to the DC voltage Ec by the DC-DC converter CV1.

  One end (plus terminal) of the capacitor CD2 is connected to the output terminal of the DC-DC converter CV1, and the other end of the capacitor CD2 is grounded. Therefore, the boosted DC voltage Ec output from the output terminal of the DC-DC converter CV1 is applied to the capacitor CD2 when conduction between the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW1, which will be described later, is interrupted. As a result, a charge obtained by the product of the capacitance of the capacitor CD2 and the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2 is stored in the capacitor CD2. A voltage is applied to the firing solenoid 142 in accordance with the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD2.

  One end of the firing solenoid 142 is connected to the output terminal of the DC-DC converter CV1, and the drain terminal D of the FET switch SW1 of the firing solenoid control unit 305 is connected to the other end of the firing solenoid 142. . In addition, a diode D2 is connected between one end and the other end of the firing solenoid 142, which is a subsequent stage of the capacitor CD2. The cathode of the diode D2 is connected to one end of the firing solenoid 142, and the anode of the diode D2 is connected to the firing solenoid 142. Connected to the other end. The diode D2 suppresses the back electromotive force (surge voltage) generated after the ball launching operation of the firing solenoid 142.

  The firing solenoid control unit 305 is a circuit for controlling on / off of the firing solenoid 142, and includes a resistor R6 having a fixed resistance value, a low-pass filter F2, a Schmitt trigger inverter IC1, an FET switch SW1, and a 5-volt voltage. It is comprised by DC power supply DC1 which supplies a DC voltage.

  The input terminal of the low-pass filter F2 is connected to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110, and one end of the resistor R6 is connected between the input / output port 205 and the input terminal of the low-pass filter F2. The other end of the resistor R6 is connected to the DC power source DC1, and if the input / output port 205 is in an on state (5 volt state), 5 volt is input to the input terminal of the low-pass filter F2, and the input / output port 205 Is in the off state (zero volt state), the input terminal of the low-pass filter F2 is in the no-input state (zero volt state). Since the input / output port 205 is repeatedly turned on / off, the firing control signal α, which is a pulse signal generated when the input / output port 205 is turned on, is input to the input terminal of the low-pass filter F2.

  When the firing control signal α is input to the input terminal of the low-pass filter F2, the noise (high-frequency component) superimposed on the firing control signal α is reduced by the low-pass filter F2. The output terminal of the low-pass filter F2 is connected to the input terminal of the Schmitt trigger inverter IC1, and the waveform of the firing control signal α input to the Schmitt trigger inverter IC1 is shaped and inverted by the Schmitt trigger inverter IC1. And is output as the firing control signal γ from the output terminal of the Schmitt trigger inverter IC1.

  The output terminal of the Schmitt trigger inverter IC1 is connected to the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW1. The drain terminal D of the FET switch SW1 is connected at one end to the other end of the firing solenoid 142 connected to the DC-DC converter CV1 and the anode of the diode D2, and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW1 is grounded. Therefore, when the firing control signal γ is input to the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW1 (5 volt state), the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW1 are brought into conduction, and the firing solenoid 142 is connected to the capacitor CD2. A voltage E1 (maximum value Ec volts) generated by the stored charge is applied. As a result, the plunger 142a of the firing solenoid 142 projects, and the ball disposed on the front surface of the firing solenoid 142 is fired toward the game area. Although details will be described with reference to FIG. 12D, the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD2 becomes the maximum value of Ec volts at the moment of application, and as time elapses, The voltage value decreases.

  On the other hand, when the firing control signal γ is not input to the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW1 (zero volt state), the conduction between the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW1 is cut off, and the voltage is applied to the firing solenoid 142. E1 is not applied. Thereby, the plunger 142a of the firing solenoid 142 is returned from the protruding state to the initial state by a spring (not shown) provided inside the firing solenoid 142.

  The ball feed solenoid control unit 306 is a circuit for controlling on / off of the ball feed solenoid 154, and includes a resistor R7 having a fixed resistance value, a low-pass filter F3, a Schmitt trigger inverter IC2, an FET switch SW2, and 5 A DC power source DC1 that supplies a DC voltage of volts and a DC power source DC2 that supplies a DC voltage of 12 volts are included.

  The input terminal of the low-pass filter F3 is connected to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110, and one end of the resistor R7 is connected between the input / output port 205 and the input terminal of the low-pass filter F3. The other end of the resistor R7 is connected to the DC power source DC1. If the input / output port 205 is in an on state (5 volts), 5 volts is input to the input terminal of the low-pass filter F3. Is in an off state (zero volt state), the input terminal of the low-pass filter F3 is in a no-input state (zero volt state). Since the input / output port 205 is repeatedly turned on and off, the ball feed control signal β, which is a pulse signal generated when the input / output port 205 is turned on, is input to the input terminal of the low-pass filter F3.

  When the ball feed control signal β is input to the input terminal of the low-pass filter F3, the low-pass filter F3 reduces noise (high frequency component) superimposed on the ball feed control signal β. The output terminal of the low-pass filter F3 is connected to the input terminal of the Schmitt trigger inverter IC2. The ball feed control signal β input to the Schmitt trigger inverter IC2 is shaped by the Schmitt trigger inverter IC2, and the waveform is It is inverted and output as a ball feed control signal δ from the output terminal of the Schmitt trigger inverter IC2.

  The output terminal of the Schmitt trigger inverter IC2 is connected to the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW2. The drain terminal D of the FET switch SW2 is connected to the other end of the ball feed solenoid 154 and the anode of the diode D3. Is connected. The source terminal S of the FET switch SW2 is grounded. Therefore, when the ball feed control signal δ is input to the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW2 (5 volt state), the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW2 are brought into conduction, and the ball feed solenoid 154 has a DC power supply. A DC voltage E2 of 12 volts supplied from DC2 is applied. Thereby, the ball feed solenoid 154 is turned on (excited), the metal piece 156 of the feed member 155 is pulled by the magnetic field of the ball feed solenoid 154, and the feed member 155 rotates upward (see FIG. 5). Therefore, the sphere G1 is accommodated in the holder portion 155a (see FIG. 5). The diode D3 suppresses a surge voltage generated when the ball feed solenoid 154 is switched from on to off.

  On the other hand, when the ball feed control signal δ is not input to the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW2 (zero volt state), the conduction between the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW2 is cut off, and the ball feed solenoid 154 is turned on. Is not applied with the DC voltage E2. As a result, the delivery member 155 is rotated downward by its own weight, and the ball G1 accommodated in the holder portion 155a is delivered downward and disposed on the front surface of the firing solenoid 142 (see FIG. 6).

  Next, the operation of the launch control device 112 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing voltage changes of each signal of the firing control device 112 shown in FIG. 8, and FIG. 10 shows changes in the variable resistor VR3 of the added voltage adjusting unit 302 of the firing control device 112 shown in FIG. It is the figure which showed the change (maximum change of DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor | condenser CD2) of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 at the time of making it.

  Further, FIG. 11 shows the firing solenoid 142 when the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 of the firing control device 112 shown in FIG. 8 is changed and the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 is changed. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing changes in the maximum value of applied voltage E1 (changes in DC voltage Ec applied to capacitor CD2). FIG. 6 is a timing chart of applied voltage E1, and ball feed control signals β and δ and DC voltage E2 applied to ball feed solenoid 154. FIG.

  In FIG. 9, the horizontal axis represents the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and the vertical axis represents the voltage of each signal. As shown in FIG. 9, the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is set from the minimum value of zero degrees to the maximum value of 120 degrees, and is variable by being connected to the operation handle 51 by the rotation operation of the operation handle 51. The DC voltage generated in the resistor VR1 (see FIG. 8) changes. When the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1, that is, the signal SA1, is input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP1 in the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301, the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP1 A signal having an amplification factor of approximately 1 is output (see FIG. 8). In the present embodiment, when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is zero degrees, the DC voltage value of the signal SA1 is about 0.7 volts, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is the maximum 120. In this case, the DC voltage value of the signal SA1 is set to about 4.3 volts.

  Next, the signal output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP1 is divided by the variable resistor VR2, and the signal SB1, which is the divided DC voltage, is input to the resistor R2 of the adder circuit unit 303 (FIG. 8). In this embodiment, when the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is zero, which is the minimum value, the DC voltage value of the signal SB1 is about 0.25 volts, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is the maximum. When the value is 120 degrees, the DC voltage value of the signal SB1 is set to about 1.55 volts.

  On the other hand, a DC voltage (about 2.25 volts in the present embodiment) generated in the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 is input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 (FIG. 2). 8). Therefore, the signal SB1 input to the resistor R2 of the adder circuit unit 303 and about 2.25 volts input to the resistor R3 of the adder circuit unit 303 are added (added) and output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP2. The

  The signal output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP2 is input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 that is a buffer amplifier, and is output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP3 with an amplification factor of approximately 1 (FIG. 8). reference). The signal output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP3 has its noise component (high frequency component) removed by the low-pass filter F1, and is output from the output terminal of the low-pass filter F1 as the signal SC1 (see FIG. 8). When the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is zero, which is the minimum value, the DC voltage value of the signal SC1 is about 0.25 volts of the DC voltage value of the signal SB1 input to the resistor R2 of the adding circuit unit 303. And the DC voltage value of 2.25 volts input to the resistor R3 of the adder circuit unit 303 is about 2.50 volts, and the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is 120 degrees, which is the maximum value. At this time, the DC voltage value of the signal SC1 is approximately 1.55 volts of the DC voltage value of the signal SB1 input to the resistor R2 of the adding circuit unit 303, and the DC voltage value of 2.5 input to the resistor R3 of the adding circuit unit 303. It is about 3.80 volts added to 25 volts.

  The signal SC1 output from the output terminal of the low-pass filter F1 is input to the input terminal of the DC-DC converter CV1, boosted, and then becomes the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2 (see FIG. 8).

  Next, referring to FIG. 10, a change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 when the variable resistor VR3 of the added voltage adjustment unit 302 of the firing control device 112 shown in FIG. (Change in DC voltage Ec applied to capacitor CD2) will be described. In FIG. 10, in order to clarify the change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 due to the change in the variable resistor VR3, the following conditions are set.

  The voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 does not perform voltage division by the variable resistor VR2 (the signal SA1 output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP1 is not divided), and the signal SA1 is input to the resistor R2 of the adding circuit unit 303 as the signal SB1. To do. Under this condition, when a constant DC voltage to be input to the resistor R3 of the adding circuit unit 303 is generated by the variable resistor VR3 of the adding voltage adjusting unit 302 (FIG. 10A), the adding voltage adjusting unit The comparison is made with the case where the variable voltage VR3 302 does not generate a DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the adder circuit unit 303 (FIG. 10B).

  In FIG. 10, the horizontal axis represents the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and the vertical axis represents the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 (DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2). Here, when the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 becomes less than 17.5 volts, the ball launched by the firing solenoid 142 becomes a foul ball. When the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 is greater than 21 volts, the ball launched by the firing solenoid 142 becomes a right-handed ball. The foul sphere is a launching rail 142 (see FIG. 5) that does not reach the launching port 68a where the return ball preventing member 68 (see FIG. 2) is located because the launching force (launching strength) of the firing solenoid 142 is weak. It means a sphere returning to the side. The right-handed ball is a ball that has a strong launching force (launching strength) of the firing solenoid 142, moves along the rail 62 after being launched from the launching port 68a, and directly hits the return rubber 69 (see FIG. 2). Means.

  As shown in FIG. 10B, when the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the adding circuit unit 303 is not generated by the variable resistor VR3 of the adding voltage adjusting unit 302, the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is set. When changing from zero degrees to 120 degrees, the maximum value of voltage E1 applied to firing solenoid 142 varies from about 4.5 volts to about 28.5 volts. Further, the range of the foul sphere is a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 from zero degrees to less than 66 degrees, and the range of the right strike ball is a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 larger than 84 degrees to 120 degrees. Yes. Therefore, the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into a game area where a prize opening or the like is provided is 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less. Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 10, the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 that is the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area is normally set to 65 degrees that is the target value of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. It is set within an arbitrary range.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10B, when the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 does not generate a DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303, the operation handle 51 is rotated. 65 degrees that is the target value of the amount is not included in the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 (66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less), and 65 degrees that is the target value of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. , You can not drive a ball into the game area. Therefore, it is necessary to adjust the firing intensity of the sphere (the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142, that is, the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2) with respect to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 10A, when a constant DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the adding circuit unit 303 is generated by the variable resistor VR3 of the adding voltage adjusting unit 302, When the amount of rotation of the handle 51 is changed from zero degrees to 120 degrees, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 can be changed from about 6.0 volts to about 30.0 volts. . Further, the range of the foul ball is a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 from zero degrees to less than 57 degrees, and the range of the right hit ball is a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 larger than 75 degrees to 120 degrees. Yes. Therefore, the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into a game area where a winning opening or the like is disposed is 57 degrees or more and 75 degrees or less. Therefore, a constant DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the adder circuit unit 303 is generated by the variable resistor VR3 of the adder voltage adjustment unit 302, and includes a target value of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 of 65 degrees. As described above, the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 that is the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area can be adjusted.

  Next, referring to FIG. 11, the variable resistor VR3 of the added voltage adjustment unit 302 of the launch control device 112 shown in FIG. 8 is changed, and the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 is changed. A change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 (change in the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2) will be described. In FIG. 11, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 when the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 is changed and the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 is changed is shown. The following conditions are used to clarify the changes.

  A constant value DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the adding circuit unit 303 is generated by the variable resistor VR3 of the adding voltage adjusting unit 302 and input to the variable resistor VR2 by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301. When the divided signal is divided into the signal SB1 (FIG. 11 (a)), the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 is input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 as in FIG. 10 (b). When the DC voltage having a constant value is not generated and the voltage input to the variable resistor VR2 is not divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 (the signal SA1 is directly used as the signal SB1) ( FIG. 11 (b)) is compared.

  In FIG. 11, as in FIG. 10, the horizontal axis represents the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51, and the vertical axis represents the maximum value of the voltage E <b> 1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 (DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD <b> 2). Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 11B, the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 does not generate a constant DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303, and the variable resistance of the voltage variation adjustment unit 301 is not generated. When the voltage input to the variable resistor VR2 is not divided by the resistor VR2, it is applied to the firing solenoid 142 when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is changed from zero degrees to 120 degrees. The maximum value of voltage E1 varies from about 4.5 volts to about 28.5 volts. Further, the range of the foul sphere is a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 from zero degrees to less than 66 degrees, and the range of the right strike ball is a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 larger than 84 degrees to 120 degrees. Yes. Therefore, the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area where the winning opening is arranged is 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less, and the target value of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is 65 degrees is not included in the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 (66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less). In addition, the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area, which originally needs to be finely adjusted, is 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less, and the width of the range Is 18 degrees.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11A, the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 generates a constant DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303, and the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 When the voltage input to the variable resistor VR2 is divided by the variable resistor VR2 to obtain the signal SB1 (FIG. 11A), the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is changed from zero degree to 120 degrees. In this case, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 changes from about 16.0 volts to about 24.0 volts. In this case, the range of the foul sphere has a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 from zero degrees to less than 23 degrees, and the range of the right strike ball has a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 larger than 77 degrees 120. It is up to degrees. Therefore, the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into a game area where a prize opening or the like is provided is 23 degrees or more and 77 degrees or less. Accordingly, a constant DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the adding circuit unit 303 is generated by the variable resistor VR3 of the adding voltage adjusting unit 302, and the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 is changed to the variable resistor VR2. When the pressure of the input signal is divided into the signal SB1, the operation handle becomes the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area so as to include the target value of 65 degrees of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51. The range of the 51 rotation operation amount can be adjusted.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 11A, a constant value DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the adding circuit unit 303 is generated by the variable resistor VR3 of the adding voltage adjusting unit 302, and the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 is used. When the voltage of the signal input to the variable resistor VR2 is divided by the variable resistor VR2 to be the signal SB1, the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area is 23 degrees or more. It is 77 degrees or less, and the width of the range is 54 degrees. Therefore, in the case of FIG. 11A, compared to 18 degrees which is the range width of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 which is the firing strength at which the ball is shot into the game area in the case of FIG. The range width of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51, which is the firing strength at which a ball is driven into the game area, is increased by 36 degrees. Therefore, the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 does not generate a constant DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303, and the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 causes the variable resistor VR2 to Compared to the case where the input signal is not divided (see FIG. 11B), a constant value direct current input to the resistor R3 of the adder circuit 303 by the variable resistor VR3 of the adder voltage adjuster 302. When the voltage is generated and the signal input to the variable resistor VR2 is divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 to obtain the signal SB1 (FIG. 11A), a ball is placed in the game area. Since the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving is widened, it is possible to finely adjust the launch intensity of the ball for driving the ball into the game area.

  Next, referring to FIG. 12, the firing permission signal SG3, the relationship between the firing control signals α, γ and the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142, and the ball feed control signals β, δ and the ball feed solenoid 154 are applied. The relationship with the DC voltage E2 will be described. FIG. 12 shows the relationship between the firing permission signal SG3, the firing control signals α, γ and the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142, and the ball feed control signals β, δ and the DC voltage E2 applied to the ball feed solenoid 154. 3 is a timing chart showing the relationship. In this embodiment, the output time S1 of the firing control signal α is 12 ms, the output time S2 of the ball feed control signal β is 74 ms, and the output period S3 of the launch control signal α and the ball feed control signal β is 602 ms. . By setting the output period S3 of the firing control signal α and the ball feed control signal β to 602 ms, the firing of the ball by the firing solenoid 142 is 99.67 or less per minute.

  As shown in FIG. 12A, when the player touches the operation handle 51, the touch sensor 51a is turned on. If the stop switch 51b is off (between t1 and t4), the firing permission signal SG3 input from the signal conversion circuit 241 to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110 is turned on (5 volt state).

  Then, the firing control signal α is output from the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110 to the firing solenoid control unit 305 of the firing control device 112 at every output period S3 (for a zero volt state, FIG. 12 ( b)). The firing control signal α output to the firing solenoid control unit 305 is inverted by the Schmitt trigger inverter IC1 (see FIG. 8) and becomes the firing control signal γ (see FIG. 12C).

  The firing control signal γ is input to the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW1 (see FIG. 8). Thus, the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW1 is turned on (5 volt state), and the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW1 are conducted during the output time S1 (see FIG. 8). When the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW1 are turned on, as shown in FIG. 12D, the charge stored in the capacitor CD2 is applied to the firing solenoid 142 as the voltage E1 (FIG. 8). reference). As a result, the plunger 142a of the firing solenoid 142 projects, and the ball disposed on the front surface of the firing solenoid 142 is fired toward the game area (see FIG. 5). Since the firing control signal α is in an off state after the output time S1 has elapsed (5 volts state), the firing control signal γ is also in an off state (zero volt state). When the firing control signal γ is turned off, the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW1 is also turned off (zero volt state), and the conduction between the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW1 is interrupted (see FIG. 8). Thereby, the plunger 142a of the firing solenoid 142 is returned from the protruding state to the initial state by a spring (not shown) provided inside the firing solenoid 142 (see FIG. 5).

  The voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 becomes Ec which is the maximum value at each of t1, t2, and t3, and the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 decreases as the charge stored in the capacitor CD2 decreases. (See FIG. 12D). The voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2 is the maximum voltage value at each of t1, t2 and t3 of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142.

  When the player releases his / her hand from the operation handle 51, the firing permission signal SG3 is turned off (after t4 in FIG. 12A, when the player is touching the operation handle 51, the stop switch 51b is on. The firing control signal α is not output from the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110, and the voltage E1 is not applied to the firing solenoid 142. Therefore, the plunger 142a of the firing solenoid 142 is not projected and remains in the initial state (see FIG. 5).

  As shown in FIG. 12 (e), when the firing permission signal SG3 is on, the ball feed control signal β is output from the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110 to the ball feed solenoid control unit 306 of the launch control device 112. Every S3, the output time S2 is output (becomes a zero volt state). The ball feed control signal β output to the ball feed solenoid control unit 306 is inverted by the Schmitt trigger inverter IC2 (see FIG. 8) to become the ball feed control signal δ (see FIG. 12 (f)).

  The ball feed control signal δ is input to the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW2 (see FIG. 8). As a result, the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW2 is turned on (5 volt state), and the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW2 are conducted during the output time S2 (see FIG. 8). When the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW2 are turned on, a DC voltage E2 (12 volts) is applied to the ball feed solenoid 154 by the DC power source DC2, as shown in FIG. (See FIG. 8). Thereby, the ball feed solenoid 154 is turned on (excited state), the metal piece 156 of the feed member 155 is pulled by the magnetic field of the ball feed solenoid 154, and the feed member 155 rotates upward (see FIG. 5). Therefore, the sphere G1 is accommodated in the holder portion 155a (see FIG. 5). Since the ball feed control signal β is turned off after the output time S2 has elapsed (5 volt state), the ball feed control signal δ is also turned off (zero volt state). When the ball feed control signal δ is turned off, the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW2 is also turned off (zero volt state), and conduction between the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW2 is interrupted ( (See FIG. 8). As a result, the delivery member 155 is rotated downward by its own weight, and the ball G1 accommodated in the holder portion 155a is delivered downward and disposed on the front surface of the firing solenoid 142 (see FIG. 6).

  When the firing permission signal SG3 is in the OFF state (after t4 in FIG. 12A), the ball feed control signal β is not output from the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110, and the ball feed solenoid 154 is also connected to the DC voltage. E2 (12 volts) is not applied. Therefore, the delivery member 155 is not rotated upward, but remains rotated downward due to its own weight (see FIG. 6).

  Note that the timing at which the launch solenoid 142 starts firing the ball and the timing at which the ball feed solenoid 154 starts to feed the ball are the same as shown in FIG. 12, but the timing at which the launch solenoid 142 launches the ball. And the timing at which the ball is placed on the front surface of the firing solenoid 142 by the ball feed solenoid 154 is not simultaneous. The reason for this will be described. The output time S2 of the ball feed control signal β for controlling the operation of the ball feed solenoid 154 is 74 ms, which is set longer than 12 ms that is the output time S1 of the launch control signal α for controlling the operation of the launch solenoid 142. . This is because when the ball feeding solenoid 154 starts ball feeding and the ball accommodated in the holder portion 155a of the ball feeding mechanism 144 is fed downward, the firing solenoid 142 completes the ball firing. This means that a longer time is required compared to the time until. Due to this time difference, a ball whose ball feeding solenoid 154 has started ball feeding at the same timing as the timing at which the firing solenoid 142 starts launching the ball will launch a ball that has been placed in front of the firing solenoid 142 in advance. After 142 is complete, it will be placed in front of firing solenoid 142. Therefore, even if the timing at which the firing solenoid 142 starts firing the ball and the timing at which the ball feed solenoid 154 starts to feed the ball are the same, the firing of the ball of the firing solenoid 142 and the ball toward the front of the firing solenoid 142 The ball firing by the firing solenoid 142 and the ball feeding by the ball feeding solenoid 154 are alternately performed.

  Next, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 13 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 13B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9” and one type of sub-shaped petal shape formed smaller than this main symbol. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) are attached to the front of the wooden box almost to the full, and attached symbols imitating characters such as furoshiki and helmets, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main controller 110 is a big win, a variable display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed, and a big hit occurs after the variable display is finished. It is configured as follows. When shifting to the high probability state (probability variation state) after the big hit, the variable display in which the main symbols (corresponding to “high probability symbols”) to which odd numbers are added is arranged. On the other hand, when shifting to the low probability state after the big hit, the variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers are added (corresponding to “low probability symbols”) are arranged. Here, the high probability state refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change). Further, the normal state (low probability state) refers to a time when the probability of hitting is not probable, and refers to a state where the probability of jackpot is normal, that is, a state where the probability of jackpot is lower than that during probability change.

  As shown in FIG. 13 (a), the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two vertically and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the 3rd symbol is variably displayed. The upper third is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect and a character.

  In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. For this reason, a total of 20 third symbols of 10 main symbols and 10 sub-designs are set in each symbol row, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 scrolls from top to bottom with periodicity. The display is changed. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. Accordingly, the third symbol display device 81 displays a total of nine third symbols of 3 rows × 3 columns. In the main display area Dm, five effective lines, that is, an upper line L1, a middle line L2, a lower line L3, a right rising line L4, and a left rising line L5 are set. In each game, the variable display stops in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and the combination of jackpot symbols on any active line at the time of the stop (in this embodiment, A jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot if the same combination of main symbols is arranged.

  The sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm and is further equally divided into three notice areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Here, the left and right notice areas Ds1, Ds3 are usually covered with double-open opaque doors that are electrically opened and closed by solenoids (not shown), and sometimes the solenoids are excited and the doors are on the front side. It is a display area that is visible to the player when it is opened. The center notice area Ds2 is a display area that is always visible without being covered by the door.

  As shown in FIG. 13B, on the actual display screen, a total of nine main symbols and sub-designs of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, the left and right doors are closed, and the left and right notice areas Ds1, Ds3 are covered and the display screen cannot be visually recognized. If either one of the left and right doors or both doors are opened during the variable display, a video is displayed in the left and right notice areas Ds1 and Ds3, and it is easy for the player to change to a big hit than usual. It is suggested. In the center notice area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a bee in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action or another character appears. The announcement effect is performed by putting out. The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is divided into upper and lower display areas Dm and Ds in principle, but the third symbol and characters are displayed larger across the display areas Dm and Ds. A display effect can be performed.

  Next, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 82, and the like.

  For the jackpot lottery or display setting of the first symbol display device 37, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, the first hit type symbol counter C2 used for the jackpot symbol selection, and the stop pattern selection counter C3, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 used for variation pattern selection are used. The second symbol random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 82, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated at an interval of 4 ms, which is an execution interval of the main process (see FIG. 18), or at an interval of 2 ms, an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and the updated value is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Stored in the counter buffer. The RAM 203 is provided with a holding ball storage area composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the ball winning timing.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is configured so that, for example, 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 738, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 738), it returns to 0. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1. Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first per-random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 738), and each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) is executed. It is updated once and updated repeatedly within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 18). The value of the first per-random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the stored ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. Stored in the area. The number of random number values that are jackpots is set at low probability and high probability, and the number of random numbers that are jackpots at low probability is 2, and the value is “373, 727” There are 14 random numbers that are big hits at high probability, and the values are "59, 109, 163, 211, 263, 317, 367, 421, 479, 523, 631, 683, 733".

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the big hit. In the present embodiment, the first hit type counter C2 is incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 4, and the maximum value ( That is, it is configured to return to 0 after reaching 4). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the stored ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. Stored in the area. In addition, the value of the random number that becomes the high probability state after the big hit is “1, 2, 3”, the value of the random number that becomes the low probability state after the big hit is “0, 4”, and two types of hit types are determined. The Therefore, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is a display mode corresponding to two types of jackpots of a high probability state and a low probability state, and one type of display mode corresponding to a deviation. Any one of the three display modes is selected.

  The stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the effect pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after reaching, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. “Stop before and after detachment reach” (for example, a range of 0 to 8), and “Leach other than detachment before and after detachment” (for example, a range of 9 to 38) after the reach has occurred and the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach design. The three stop (effect) patterns are selected as “completely out” (for example, a range of 39 to 238) that does not cause reach. The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. Stored in

  Further, the stop pattern selection counter C3 is provided with a plurality of tables having different ranges of random number values from which the stop pattern is selected. This depends on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state or a low probability state, in which area of the reserved ball storage area each random number value is stored (ie, the number of reserved balls), etc. This is to change the stop pattern selection ratio.

  For example, in a high probability state, a table with a wide random value range of 10 to 238 corresponding to the stop pattern of “completely out” is selected so that a jackpot is likely to occur and a reach effect is not selected more than necessary. It becomes easy to select “completely off”. In this table, “front / rear out of reach” is narrowed to 0-5, and “reach other than front / rear out of reach” is also narrowed to 6-9, making it difficult to select “rear out of front / rear out of reach” or “reach out of front / rear out of reach”. Further, if each random number value is not stored in the holding ball storage area in a low probability state, a disturbance corresponding to the stop pattern of “completely off” in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first entrance 64. A table with a narrow numerical value range of 51 to 238 is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select. In this table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop pattern of “reach other than front / rear deviation” is as wide as 9 to 50, and “reach other than front / rear deviation” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, the ball entry time to the first entrance 64 can be secured, and therefore, the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is easily performed continuously.

  Of the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2, one variation type counter CS1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 198) and then returns to 0. The other variation type counter CS2 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 240, for example, and reaches the maximum value (that is, 240) and then returns to 0. In the following description, CS1 is also referred to as “first variation type counter”, and CS2 is also referred to as “second variation type counter”.

  Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach, super reach, and premium reach are determined by the first variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Further, the second variation type counter CS2 determines a variation time (in other words, the number of variation symbols) until the final stop symbol (in this embodiment, the middle symbol) stops after the reach occurs. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, the display control device 114 determines the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. Therefore, a variety of variation patterns can be easily realized by combining these variation type counters CS1 and CS2. It is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode only by the first variation type counter CS1, or to determine the symbol variation mode similarly by combining the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol. The values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 18) described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process.

  For example, the value of the variation type counter CS3 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 162, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 162). In the following description, CS3 is also referred to as a “third variation type counter”. The 3rd symbol display device 81 of this Embodiment performs the decorative production according to the display mode of the 1st symbol display device 37, and can slide the symbol which is changing in addition to the variation of a symbol. A notice effect such as passing a notice character for notifying the occurrence of the reach effect is performed. The effect pattern of the notice effect is selected by the variation type counter CS3. Specifically, the time required for the notice effect is added to the variable time, or on the contrary, the variable time is subtracted to shorten the variable display time, or an effect pattern that does not add or subtract the variable time is selected. . As with the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS3 is provided with a plurality of tables with different ranges of random values from which the production pattern is selected, and whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state. Depending on the low probability state or in which area of the reserved ball storage area each random value is stored, the selection ratio of each effect pattern is different.

  As described above, the variation time of the symbol variation is determined by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, and the time to be added to or subtracted from the variation time is determined by the variation type counter CS3. Therefore, the final fluctuation time until the final stop symbol stops is determined by the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 250, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). In this embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt process, and the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67 on either the left or right side. Obtained when detected. The number of random number values to be won is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second per-random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21). As well as being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 18).

  Next, a command output from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating commands output from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111. The command is composed of 2 bytes, and is output as 8-bit parallel data from the main controller 110 to the payout controller 111 via the connectors 207 and 217 in the order of the first byte and the second byte. In the first byte of the command, the most significant bit is set (“1”), and in the second byte, the most significant bit is reset (“0”). Therefore, the payout control device 111 can determine whether the input data is the first byte or the second byte of the command by setting or resetting the most significant bit.

  Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not necessarily use all of the commands shown in FIG. That is, there is also a pachinko machine 10 that uses only a part of the commands shown in FIG. For example, there is a pachinko machine 10 in which only a payout return command, a payout initialization command, a 5-ball award payout command, and a 15-ball award payout command are used.

  Data input / output between the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 is performed only in one direction from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111. This is because the number of input signals to the main control device 110 that performs the main control of the game is reduced as much as possible to suppress illegal acts on the main control device 110. For this reason, even if the output command data changes due to noise, signal line disconnection or short, fraud, etc., the main control device 110 cannot detect it and cannot detect an abnormality.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the command output from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111 is composed of 2 bytes and these are added or exclusive ORed one byte at a time, the least significant 1 byte after the operation Is set to FFH. Therefore, in the payout control device 111, the input 2-byte command is added or exclusive-ORed byte by byte, and if the result is not FFH, the command is determined not to be a normal command and the command input Is invalidated, and a letter “C” is displayed on the 7-segment LED 121 provided in the payout control device 111 to notify a command error.

  Commands output from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111 include a prize ball command for instructing the payout of prize balls. Since the prize ball command has a great influence on the player and the game hall, even if the output of the command is only one direction from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111, it is input by the payout control device 111. It is configured so that it can be determined whether or not the command is normal.

  If there is a break in the signal line that outputs the prize ball command, it can be reliably detected by the above method (the result of addition or exclusive OR is FFH). That is, if any one of the signal lines is disconnected, the data (bit) of the signal line is always the same data (“0 and 0” or “1 and 1”) in both the first byte and the second byte. Therefore, when the first byte and the second byte of the command are added or exclusive ORed, the bit corresponding to the broken signal line becomes 0, and the result of the addition or exclusive OR does not become FFH. It is.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the payout control device 111 is started up, the payout return command and the payout initialization command that are always output from the main control device 110 are used, and signal lines for transmitting these commands, It is possible to detect whether or not there is a short (solder bridge) in the connectors 207 and 217 connecting the signal lines.

  FIG. 16A is a diagram illustrating an arrangement of signal pins of the connector 207 provided in the main control device 110, and FIG. 16B is an illustration of an arrangement of signal pins of the connector 217 provided in the payout control device 111. FIG.

  A short of a signal line or a signal pin or a solder bridge occurs in an adjacent signal line (pin). As shown in FIG. 16A, the connector 207 of the main controller 110 has signal pins arranged adjacent to each other in the bit order. Therefore, by setting the first byte of the payout initialization command to AAH (1010B) and the second byte to 55H (0101B), the adjacent signal line or signal pin of the connector 207 is changed according to the output of the payout initialization command. Alternately set or reset. Therefore, when the payout control device 111 can normally input the payout initialization command, it is possible to detect that there is no short circuit or solder bridge in these signal lines or signal pins.

  Further, the connector 217 of the payout device 111 has signal pins arranged in two stages as shown in FIG. Therefore, by setting the first byte of the payout return command to 99H (1001B) and the second byte to 66H (0110B), the signal lines adjacent in the vertical and horizontal directions of the connector 217 are output according to the output of the payout return command. Alternatively, the signal pins can be set or reset alternately. Moreover, by setting the first byte of the payout initialization command to AAH (1010B) and the second byte to 55H (0101B), the signal line or signal pin diagonally adjacent to the connector 217 is output according to the output of the payout initialization command. Can be set or reset alternately. Accordingly, when the payout control device 111 can normally input the payout return command and the payout initialization command, it is possible to detect that there is no short circuit or solder bridge in these signal lines or signal pins.

  The connector 217 may be configured with the arrangement shown in FIG. 16A, or the connector 207 may be configured with the arrangement shown in FIG. Furthermore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 may be connected using a connector other than the arrangement shown in FIG. 16 (a) or FIG. 16 (b). In such a case, the payout return command and the payout initialization command are configured as data that alternately sets or resets signal lines or signal pins adjacent in the vertical and horizontal directions of the connector.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 17 to 23. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 ms). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process The main process will be described.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process is executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, for example, every 2 ms. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (S501). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S502). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in the present embodiment), and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are updated (S503). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are the maximum values (this embodiment) Then, when 738, 4, 238, 250) are reached, they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Thereafter, a start winning process (see FIG. 22) associated with winning at the first entrance 64 is executed (S504), a firing control process is executed (S505), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the firing control process, it is detected that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is not operated, This is a process for determining / off. Specifically, the payout control is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). A firing permission signal SG3 is input from the signal conversion circuit 241 of the substrate 111 to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110. When the launch permission signal SG3 is input to the input / output port 205, the MPU 201 outputs the launch control signal α from the input / output port 205 to the launch solenoid control unit 305 (see FIG. 8) of the launch control device 112. A ball feed control signal β is output from the input / output port 205 to the ball feed solenoid control unit 306 of the control device 112. When the firing permission signal SG3 is not input to the input / output port 205, the MPU 201 does not output the firing control signal α and the ball feed control signal β.

  With reference to the flowchart of FIG. 22, the start winning process executed in the process of S504 will be described. First, it is determined whether or not the ball has won (start winning) at the first entrance 64 (S601). If it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S601: Yes), whether or not the number N of operation-reserved balls of the first symbol display device 37 is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment). Is determined (S602). If there is a winning at the first entrance 64 and the number of operation-reserved balls N <4 (S602: Yes), the number N of operation-reserved balls is incremented by 1 (S603), and further updated in step S503. The values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are stored in the first area among the free reserved areas in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 (S604). On the other hand, if there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S601: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, if the number N of operational reserves is not N <4 (S602: No). , S603 and S604 are skipped, the start winning process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S701), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout and emission control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. This start-up process is activated by a reset interrupt process at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S101). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance in the stack pointer is set, and the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) become operable. In order to wait, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. Next, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 123 provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S104). If it is turned on (S104: Yes), the process proceeds to S110. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 123 is not turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S105), and if not stored (S105: No). Since the backup data is not stored, in this case as well, the process proceeds to S110.

  If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105: Yes), a RAM determination value is calculated (S106). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S107: No), that is, the calculated RAM determination is performed. If the value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process proceeds to S110 even in such a case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S213 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the processing of S110, a payout initialization command (see FIG. 15) is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S110). Upon receipt of this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state where ball payout control can be started (see FIG. 28). After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S111, S112) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, at the start of business in the hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 123. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 123 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S111, S112) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S111, S112) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). . In the RAM initialization process (S111, S112), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S111), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S112). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S113.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 123 is not turned on (S104: No), information on occurrence of power shutdown is stored (S105: Yes), and if the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S107: Yes), the information on the occurrence of power interruption is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S108). Next, a payout return command (refer to FIG. 15) for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S109), and the process proceeds to S113. To do. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213 (see FIG. 28).

  In the process of S113, an interrupt is permitted and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S201 to S206 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S209 and S210 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, output data such as a command updated in the previous process is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub-side (S201). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S501 is determined, and if there is winning detection information, a winning ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls is transmitted to the payout control device 111. As shown in FIG. 15, the prize ball command is composed of 15 types of 2-byte commands of FE01H to F00FH, and by this external output processing, a total of 2 bytes are consecutively transmitted through the connectors 207 and 217. The byte is transmitted (output) to the payout control device 111. In addition, by this external output process, a variation pattern command, a stop symbol command, a stop command, an effect time addition command, etc. required for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted via the connectors 208 and 228. It is transmitted (output) to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted (output) to the launch control device 112.

  Next, each value of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 is updated (S202). Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (198, 240, and 162 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS 1, CS 2, and CS 3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counters CS1, CS2 and CS3 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S203), and the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 is performed. A variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the three symbol display device 81 is executed (S204). Details of the variation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the end of the variation process, a large opening opening / closing process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed in the case of the big win state (S205). That is, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning opening 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds.

  Next, a display control process of the second symbol (for example, the symbol “◯” or “x”) by the second symbol display device 82 is executed (S206). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 82 is obtained. In the display unit 83, the second symbol variation display is performed. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is performed according to the value of the second winning random number counter C4, and when the winning state of the second symbol is reached, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is released for a predetermined time.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S207). If the information on the occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the RAM 203 (S207: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S208). If the predetermined time has already passed (S208: Yes), the process proceeds to S201, and the processes after S201 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S208: No), the first time is within the remaining time until the predetermined time is reached, that is, until the next main process is executed. The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 are repeatedly updated (S209, S210).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S209). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738, 250 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Next, the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are updated (S210). Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (198, 240, and 162 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S201-S206 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S207, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207: Yes), the power failure is caused by the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 23 has been executed, the power-off process after S211 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S211), and a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). It transmits to (S212). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S213), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S214), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S207 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S201 to S206 is completed, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S209 and S210 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can start from the process of S201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S201 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at power-off, the stack pointer is not stored in the initial setting process (S101) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S201. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the variation process (S204) will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. In the variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is currently being hit (S301). The jackpot includes the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the jackpot is won and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. As a result of the determination, if it is a big hit (S301: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not a big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. (S302: No), it is determined whether or not the number N of active suspension balls is greater than 0 (S303). If the number N of active balls is 0 (S303: No), this process is terminated. If the number of the operation hold balls N> 0 (S303: Yes), the operation hold ball number N is decremented by 1 (S304), and the data stored in the hold ball storage area is shifted (S305). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area to the execution area side, and the reserved first area → execution area, reserved second area → The data in each area is shifted such as the first hold area, the third hold area → the second hold area, the fourth hold area → the third hold area. After the data shift process, the fluctuation start process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S306). The variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S302, if it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time has elapsed (S307). The display time during the change of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counters CS1 and CS2 and the addition time selected by the change type counter CS3. If it has not elapsed (S307: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S308). In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red until the variation time elapses after the variation starts, the red LED is Turn off and turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED. If the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. A display mode for turning off the red LED and turning on the red LED is set. The variation process is executed every 4 ms. However, if the LED lighting color is changed for each variation process, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, in order to make the player confirm the change in the LED lighting color, each time the change process is executed, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is turned on. The color is changed, and the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset (cleared to 0) when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S307: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S309). In the setting of the stop symbol, whether or not a big hit is determined according to the value of the first per-random number counter C1, and in the case of a big hit, a symbol that becomes a high probability state after the big hit by the value of the first per-type type counter C2 Or a symbol that is in a low probability state is determined. In this embodiment, a red LED is turned on when a high probability state is reached after a big hit, a green LED is turned on when a low probability state is reached, and a blue LED is turned on when it is out of place. . In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the processing of S309, the variation stop of the third symbol display device 81 is stopped to synchronize with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37. A command is set (S310). When the sound lamp control device 113 receives this stop command, it instructs the display control device 114 to stop. When the variation time elapses, the third symbol display device 81 stops the variation, and receives the stop command, whereby one variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 ends.

  Next, the variation start process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the variation start process (S306), first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is made based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area (S401). Whether it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the first random number counter value and the mode at that time. As described above, “373,727” is a winning value among the numerical values 0 to 738 of the first per random number counter C1 at a normal low probability, and “59, 109, 163, 211, 263, 317, 367 at a high probability. , 421, 479, 523, 631, 683, 733 "is the winning value.

  When it is determined that it is a big hit (S401: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is confirmed, and the display mode for the big hit is set (S402). ). In the process of S402, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2, whether to shift to the high probability state or shift to the low probability state after the big hit is set. When the transition state after the big hit is set, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set. Further, based on the transition state after the jackpot, the jackpot stop symbol of the third symbol display device 81 is set by the display control device 114. That is, the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 can be set by setting the transition state after the big hit in the process of S402. Of the numerical values 0 to 4 of the first hit type counter C2, when “0, 4”, the state shifts to the low probability state, and when “1, 2, 3”, the state shifts to the high probability state.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S403). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S403, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol is determined. The At this time, the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 are confirmed, and rough symbol fluctuations such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach are determined based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. In addition to determining the variation time, the variation time (in other words, the number of variation symbols) until the final stop symbol (in the present embodiment, the middle symbol Z2) stops after the occurrence of reach is determined based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2. decide.

  The relationship between the numerical value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the variation time, and the relationship between the numerical value of the second variation type counter CS2 and the variation time are respectively defined in advance by a table or the like. However, the fluctuation time can be set using only the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 without using the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2, and can be set only with the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. Whether or not to set with both values of both variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is appropriately determined according to the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the game conditions each time.

  If it is determined in the process of S401 that it is not a big hit (S401: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S404). In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, An effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set to indicate whether the reach is front / rear out of reach, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out. In the present embodiment, as described above, the range of values corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 depends on whether the state is a high probability state, a low probability state, and the operation suspension number N. Different tables are set up.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of detachment is determined (S405), the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the detachment symbol. Is determined. At this time, as in the process of S403, the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 are confirmed, and the normal reach, super reach, and premium reach are determined based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1. In addition to determining the fluctuation time of the rough symbol variation such as, the variation time until the final stop symbol (the middle symbol Z2 in the present embodiment) stops after the reach occurs based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2 (in other words, paraphrase) For example, the number of fluctuating symbols) is determined.

  When the process of S403 or the process of S405 is completed, the effect time to be added to or subtracted from the variation time determined by the first and second type counters CS1 and CS2 is determined (S406). At this time, the addition / subtraction of effect time is determined based on the value of the third type counter CS3 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display The variation time of the device 81 is set. In the present embodiment, the effect time addition / subtraction is determined according to the value of the third variation type counter CS3 when the variation display time is not changed and when the variation display time is added for one second, the variation display time is set to 2. In the case of adding seconds, four types of addition values are determined for the case of subtracting 1 second from the variable display time.

  In addition, when the variable display time is added or subtracted, a notice effect that increases the expected value of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a slip effect that causes the change time of the variable symbol to be longer than usual and is accompanied by a slip) An effect of displaying a notice character is produced, for example, an effect of making the change time of one change symbol shorter than usual and stopping it immediately). In addition, when the value of the first random number counter C1 is a big hit, the probability that an added value of 2 seconds is selected is set high, so that the player expects a big hit by confirming the notice effect. Can do.

  Next, a variation pattern command is set according to the variation pattern (variation time) determined in S403 or S405 (S407), and a stop symbol command is set according to the stop symbol set in S402 or S404. (S408). Then, an effect time addition command is set according to the added value of the effect time determined in the process of S406 (S409), and the process returns to the variation process.

  Next, payout control executed by the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the startup process of the payout control device 111, and this startup process is executed when the power is turned on. First, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S801). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, the RAM access is permitted (S802), and an external interrupt vector is set (S803).

  After that, data backup processing is executed for the RAM 213 in the MPU 211. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 (S804). If not stored (S804: No), the backup data is not stored, so the process proceeds to S811. Transition. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 (S804: Yes), a RAM determination value is calculated (S805). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S805: No), that is, the calculated RAM determination is performed. If the value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S811. As will be described later in the processing of S917 in FIG. 25, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address in the RAM 213. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 213 is correctly stored.

  In the RAM initialization process of S811 and S812, all areas of the RAM 213 are cleared to 0 (S811), and then the initial value of the RAM 213 is set (S812). Thereafter, the peripheral devices of the MPU 211 are initialized (S809), an interrupt is permitted (S810), and the process proceeds to the main process.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of power interruption is set (S804: Yes) and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal (S806: Yes), the data backed up in the RAM 213 is retained. In addition to clearing the information on the occurrence of power interruption (S807), the payout permission flag 213d is turned off (S808) in order to wait for the payout of the prize ball. Thereafter, the peripheral devices of the MPU 211 are initialized (S809), an interrupt is permitted (S810), and the process proceeds to the main process.

  Next, the main process executed by the MPU 211 in the payout control apparatus 111 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this main process, first, a winning ball command, a payout return command, and a payout initialization command from the main control device 110 are received, and a command determination process for determining the type of these commands is performed (S901). Although details of the command determination process will be described later, in this process, when a normal command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the payout permission flag 213d is turned on and the payout of the winning ball or the loaned ball is permitted.

  That is, after execution of the command determination process (S901), the state of the payout permission flag 213d is determined (S902), and if the payout permission flag 213d is not turned on (S902: No), the main controller 110 is still in the started state. Therefore, in such a case, the command determination process (S901) is repeatedly executed until the payout permission flag 213d is turned on in the command determination process (S901). On the other hand, if the payout permission flag 213d is turned on in the processing of S902 (S902: Yes), the main control device 110 has already started up. In such a case, the state return switch 120 is checked and the state is checked. When it is determined that the return operation is started, the state return operation is executed (S903).

  Thereafter, the setting of the lower pan full tank state or the lower pan full tank release state is executed according to the change in the state of the lower pan 50 (S904). That is, when the lower pan 50 is determined based on the detection signal of the lower pan full switch, the lower pan full state is set when the lower pan is full. , Set the lower pan full release state. Further, the setting of the tank ball absence state or the tank ball absence release state is executed according to the change in the state of the tank ball (S905). In other words, the tank ball no switch state is determined based on the detection signal of the tank ball no switch, and when there is no tank ball, the setting of the tank ball no state is executed. Perform configuration. Thereafter, the presence / absence of a notification state is determined. If there is a notification state, notification is made by the 7-segment LED 121 provided in the payout control device 111 (S906). The state notification process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, prize ball payout processing is executed by each processing from S907 to S909. That is, if the prize ball cannot be paid out and the value of the total prize ball number memory 213a for storing the number of prize balls is not 0 (S907: No, S908: No), the prize ball is paid out. The ball control process is started (S909). On the other hand, if the prize ball cannot be paid out (S907: Yes) or if the value of the total prize ball number memory 213a is 0 (S908: Yes), the process proceeds to a rental ball payout process.

  In the ball lending payout process from S910 to S912, if a ball lending payout request is not received and a ball lending payout request from the card unit is received (S910: No, S911: Yes), the ball lending is paid out. The ball rental control process is started. On the other hand, if the rental ball cannot be dispensed (S910: Yes) or if a rental ball dispensing request has not been received (S911: No), the process proceeds to S913. Similarly, after the ball rental control process (S912) is completed, the process proceeds to S913.

  In the process of S913, the control of the vibrator 134 (vibration motor control) is executed on the condition that the ball is clogged (S913). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 (S914). If the occurrence information of power interruption is not stored (S914: No), the power failure signal SG1 is received from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. Since it is not output and the power supply is not shut off, in such a case, the process proceeds to S901, and the main process from S901 to S913 is repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the process of S914 (S914: Yes), the result of the power failure is output due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. This means that the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 23 has been executed. Therefore, in such a case, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S915), and the command determination process is executed again in order to prevent the reception of a command transmitted from the main controller 110 (S916). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the RAM 213 (S917), access to the RAM 213 is prohibited (S918), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, for example, the RAM determination value is a checksum value in the stack area and the work area to be backed up in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S914, since the information on the occurrence of power interruption is confirmed at the timing when one cycle of the main process of the payout control device 111 ends, the process is started up when returning from the state before the power interruption. After the process is completed, the process can be started from S901. In other words, the main process can be started in the same manner as when initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at power-off, the contents of each register used by the MPU 211 are not saved in the stack area, or the stack pointer value is not saved in the initial setting process (S801) without saving the stack pointer value. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process can be started from S901. Therefore, the control burden on the payout control device 111 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the payout control device 111 to malfunction or run away. Further, since the power-off process is executed at the timing when each process is completed, the amount of information to be backed up in the RAM 213 can be reduced.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed in the main process of the payout control device 111. The command determination process determines whether or not the received command is a normal command, and executes a process corresponding to the command if the received command is a normal command.

  First, it is checked whether there is a new reception command (S1001). If there is no new reception command (S1001: No), this process is terminated. If there is a new reception command (S1001: Yes), it is determined whether the reception command is the first byte data or the second byte data (S1002). As described above with reference to FIG. 15, if the most significant bit is set, the data is the first byte (S1002: Yes). In this case, is the value of the upper command storage buffer 213b 0? (S1003).

  When the command receives 2 bytes, the value of the upper command storage buffer 213b is cleared to 0. Therefore, if the command is normal, the value of the upper command storage buffer 213b is 0 when the first byte of data is received. Therefore, if the value of the upper command storage buffer 213b is not 0 (S1003: No), some abnormality has occurred, so the payout error flag 213c is turned on (S1004), and the process proceeds to S1005. On the other hand, if the value of the upper command storage buffer 213b is 0 (S1003: Yes), the process of S1004 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1005. In the process of S1005, the received first byte data is written into the upper command storage buffer 213b and stored (S1005).

  In the process of S1002, if the received command is not the first byte data but the second byte data (S1002: No), the received command is the second byte data and the upper command is stored in S1005 process. The value stored in the buffer 213b, that is, the first byte data is added (S1006). If the result of the addition is FFH (S1007: Yes), since the received command is normal, it is checked whether the value of the upper command storage buffer 213b is F0H or more (S1008).

  As shown in FIG. 15, if the value of the upper command storage buffer 213b is equal to or greater than F0H (S1008: Yes), the received command is a prize ball command. In this case, a prize ball payout number setting process is executed. (S1009). On the other hand, if the value of the upper command storage buffer 213b is not equal to or greater than F0H (S1008: No), the received command is a payout return command or a payout initialization command. In such a case, a state setting process is executed ( S1010). After execution of the winning ball payout number setting process or the state setting process, the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described process is repeated. The prize ball payout number setting process or the state setting process will be described later.

  In the process of S1007, if the result of the addition of the first byte data and the second byte data is not FFH (S1007: No), some abnormality has occurred. Therefore, in such a case, the payout error flag 213c is turned on (S1011) to indicate the occurrence of a command error, the value of the upper command storage buffer 213b is cleared to 0 (S1012), and the received 2-byte command is displayed. Disable it. Thereby, malfunction of the payout control apparatus 111 due to reception of an abnormal command can be prevented. After the process of S1012, the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described process is repeated.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a prize ball payout number setting process (S1009) executed in the command determination process. In the prize ball payout number setting process, the value of the total prize ball number memory 213a is updated according to the received prize ball command.

  First, it is checked whether or not the number of prize balls of the received prize ball command is 1 or more and 15 or less (S1101). Otherwise (S1101: No), an incorrect prize ball command is received (FIG. 15). reference). Therefore, in such a case, the received command is invalidated and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the number of prize balls of the received prize ball command is 1 or more and 15 or less (S1101: Yes), the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball command is added to the total prize ball number memory 213a (S1102). The added number of prize balls is paid out by the above-described prize ball control process (S909). Thereafter, the value of the upper command storage buffer 213b is cleared to 0 (S1103), and in preparation for receiving the next command, the payout permission flag 213d is turned on (S1104), and the payout of the winning ball is permitted. Further, the payout error flag 213c is turned off (S1105), and this process is terminated.

  In this way, since the payout error flag 213c is turned off by receiving a normal command, even when an abnormal command is temporarily input due to noise or the like, by inputting the normal command, The command error notification can be canceled and the game can be continued normally.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the state setting process (S1010) executed in the command determination process. In the state setting process, a process according to the payout return command or the payout initialization command is executed.

  If the received command is a payout return command (S1201: Yes), the process proceeds to S1206. Then, the payout permission flag 213d is turned on (S1206), the payout of the prize ball is permitted, the value of the upper command storage buffer 213b is cleared to 0 (S1207), and a payout error is further prepared in preparation for reception of the next command. The flag 213c is turned off (S1208), and this process ends.

  If the received command is a payout initialization command (S1201: No, S1202: Yes), the state of the payout permission flag 213d is checked (S1203). If the payout permission flag 213d is off (S1203: No), the payout initialization command is normally received. In this case, the work area of the RAM 213 is cleared to 0 (S1204), and is initialized to the work area. An initial value for the hour is set (S1205), and the work area of the RAM 213 is initialized.

  Thereafter, as in the case of receiving the payout return command, the payout permission flag 213d is turned on (S1206), the payout of the winning ball is permitted, and the value of the upper command storage buffer 213b is cleared to 0 (S1207). In addition, the payout error flag 213c is turned off (S1208), and the process is terminated.

  Even if the received command is a payout initialization command (S1201: No, S1202: Yes), if the payout permission flag 213d is turned on (S1203: Yes), one of the normal ones shown in FIG. Upon receiving the command, the prize ball payout control is enabled. Therefore, in such a case, in order to avoid initialization of the work area of the RAM 213, the processing from S1204 to S1206 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S1207. Thereafter, the value of the upper command storage buffer 213b is cleared to 0 (S1207), the payout error flag 213c is turned off (S1208) in preparation for the reception of the next command, and this process is terminated.

  Note that if the received command is not a payout return command (S1201: No) and is not a payout initialization command (S1202: No), it means that an incorrect prize ball command has been received (see FIG. 15). In this case, the received command is invalidated and this process is terminated.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a state notification process (S906) executed in the main process. In the status notification process, first, the status of the payout error flag 213c is confirmed (S1301), and if it is turned on (S1301: Yes), the character “C” is displayed on the 7-segment LED 121 to generate a command error. Notification is made (S1302). On the other hand, when the payout error flag 213c is not turned on (S1302: No), or after the processing of S1302, other states of the payout control device 111 such as the full state of the lower plate 50 and the storage state of the tank balls. (S1303), and this process is terminated.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the direct-current voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 when the resistance value of the variable resistor VR1 changes based on the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51. Changes. The DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301, and the divided DC voltage is input to the resistor R2 of the adding circuit unit 303. When the DC voltage output from the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 is input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303, the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 receives the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301. A voltage obtained by adding the DC voltage divided by the above and the DC voltage output by the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjusting unit 302 is output. Based on the output voltage output from the operational amplifier OP <b> 2 of the adder circuit unit 303, the voltage supply unit 304 controls the firing intensity of the sphere launched from the firing solenoid 142.

  Here, as shown in the above Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2000-202094, in the conventional ball launcher, when adjusting the launch intensity of the ball launched by the solenoid, the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob are rotated. The firing intensity is adjusted by mechanically moving the solenoid up and down and back and forth. Therefore, when the player or the like has an impact on the gaming machine or when the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob are loosened due to changes over time, the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob are misaligned. Will occur. Therefore, there has been a problem in that a prescribed firing strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle does not occur due to the displacement of the position at which the solenoid pier collides with the ball.

  On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the DC voltage input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP2 of the adder circuit unit 303 is converted into the variable resistor of the adder voltage adjustment unit 302. By adjusting with VR3, the DC voltage divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 is generated in the variable resistor VR3 of the adding voltage adjusting unit 302 from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP2 of the adding circuit unit 303. A DC voltage obtained by adding the DC voltages is output. Therefore, by adjusting the DC voltage input to the operational amplifier OP2 of the adding circuit unit 303 by the variable resistor VR3, the range width of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 that becomes the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area (game) If the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51, which is the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the area, is in the range of 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less, the range width is 18 degrees) without changing the range. It is possible to change the range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 that is the firing strength at which the is driven. For example, when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51, which is the firing strength at which a ball is driven into the game area, is in the range of 66 degrees to 84 degrees, the center value of 75 degrees is added by the variable resistor VR3. By adjusting the DC voltage input to the operational amplifier OP2 of the circuit unit 303, the center value is set to 66 degrees, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 that is the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area is set to 57 degrees or more and 75 degrees. The following ranges can be adopted.

  Therefore, as described above, by adjusting the DC voltage input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 by the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302, the operation handle It is possible to adjust the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 that is the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area so as to include, for example, 65 degrees that is the target value of the rotation operation amount of 51.

  Further, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is divided by the variable resistor VR2, so that the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The divided voltage fluctuation range (the difference between the minimum DC voltage value generated in the variable resistor VR2 and the maximum DC voltage value) is changed to the voltage fluctuation range generated in the variable resistor VR1 (in the variable resistor VR1). The difference between the minimum DC voltage value generated and the maximum DC voltage value can be reduced. That is, the slope of the divided voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 (the straight line connecting the minimum value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 and the maximum value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 (signal SB1 in FIG. 9). ) Of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 (the minimum value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 and the maximum voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1). Compared to the straight line connecting the values (the slope of the signal SA1 in FIG. 9), the value can be reduced.

  Here, since the divided voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 becomes a voltage input to the resistor R2 of the adder circuit unit 303, a fluctuation range (slope) of the voltage input to the resistor R2 of the adder circuit unit 303 is obtained. In addition, the fluctuation range of the output voltage output from the operational amplifier OP2 of the adder circuit unit 303 (the slope of the signal SC1 in FIG. 9) can also be reduced. Then, as the fluctuation range (slope) of the output voltage output from the operational amplifier OP2 of the adder circuit unit 303 is reduced, the fluctuation range (slope) of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 is also reduced. . Since the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 for driving a ball into the game area is within a certain range (for example, 17.5 volts to 21.0 volts (see FIG. 11)), the voltage applied to the firing solenoid 142 By reducing the fluctuation range (tilt) of E1, it is possible to widen the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area (for example, the firing intensity at which the ball is driven into the game area). The amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is in the range of 66 degrees to 84 degrees, and the range width of 18 degrees can be set to a range of 23 degrees to 77 degrees (see FIG. 11). )). Accordingly, the range of the operation amount of the operation handle 51 can be adjusted so as to include, for example, 65 degrees that is the target value of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51.

  Note that the voltage divided by the variable resistor VR2 is smaller than the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. However, this reduced voltage can be compensated by a DC voltage input from the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303. Thereby, even if the variation range of the launch intensity of the sphere is reduced by the variable resistor VR2, the rotation of the operation handle 51 can be performed by increasing the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the adder circuit unit 303 by the variable resistor VR3. The launch intensity of the ball fired from the launch solenoid 142 with respect to the manipulated variable can be the launch intensity for driving the ball into the game area.

  Moreover, the range of the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 which becomes the firing strength at which a ball is driven into the game area can be changed to have a wide range width. In other words, it is possible to widen the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 that provides the firing strength with which the ball is driven into the game area. Therefore, it is possible to finely adjust the firing strength for driving a ball into the game area by the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51.

  Here, as shown in the above Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2000-202094, in the conventional ball launcher, the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob are rotated to mechanically move the solenoid up and down and back and forth. Since the launch intensity is adjusted, the accuracy of the launch intensity adjustment depends on the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob, and the adjustment accuracy of the prescribed launch intensity according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle is There was a problem that it was low.

  However, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the direct current that is input from the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303 is set as the launch intensity of the sphere launched by the launch solenoid 142. The voltage is adjusted by the voltage and the DC voltage input from the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303. In general, the direct current voltage is easy to finely and accurately adjust, and has a property that is resistant to change with time (not easily distorted), so the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 that provides the firing strength with which a ball is driven into the game area. Alternatively, the range width can be finely and accurately adjusted, and the adjustment can be made resistant to change with time (not easily distorted).

  Further, since the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 includes the variable resistor VR2, the DC voltage input from the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 to the resistor R2 of the adding circuit unit 303 can be changed (finely adjusted). Here, the DC voltage input from the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 to the resistor R2 of the adding circuit unit 303 may change from the initially set value due to a change with time of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 or the like. In this case, the output voltage output from the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 to the voltage supply unit 304 also changes as the DC voltage input from the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303 changes. To do. Then, since the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 also changes, the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area changes from the initially set range. . In addition, the range width of the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into the game area may be smaller than the initially set range width.

  In these cases, the voltage value input from the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 to the resistor R2 of the adding circuit unit 303 is changed (finely adjusted) by the variable resistor VR2, so that the operational amplifier OP2 of the adding circuit unit 303 supplies the voltage supply unit. The output voltage output to 304 can be changed (finely adjusted). Thereby, the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 can be changed (finely adjusted), and the firing intensity of the sphere launched from the firing solenoid 142 can be changed (finely adjusted). Therefore, the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 or the range width of the operation handle 51, which is the firing strength at which the ball is shot into the game area, can be changed (finely adjusted) to the initially set range or the initially set range width. it can.

  Further, the voltage value input from the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 to the resistor R2 of the adding circuit unit 303 is changed using the variable resistor VR2. In general, a variable resistor has a simple configuration and is inexpensive as compared with a power supply circuit configured by a complicated circuit. Therefore, it is possible to finely adjust the range of the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 or the range width of the operation handle 51 as the launching strength at which the ball is driven into the game area by using the variable resistor VR2 having a simple configuration and low cost.

  Further, since the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 includes the variable resistor VR3, the DC voltage input from the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 can be changed (finely adjusted). The DC voltage input from the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 is the same as the DC voltage input from the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303. They are only added together by the adder circuit unit 303. Therefore, the fluctuation range of the output voltage output from the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 is the same as the fluctuation range of the DC voltage input from the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303. However, only the voltage value of the output voltage output from the operational amplifier OP2 of the adder circuit unit 303 can be changed (finely adjusted). The firing intensity of the sphere fired by the firing solenoid 142 is determined based on the output voltage output from the operational amplifier OP2 of the adding circuit unit 303 to the voltage supply unit 304. Therefore, by changing (fine-tuning) the DC voltage input from the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303, the operation handle 51 becomes a firing strength at which a ball is driven into the game area. It is possible to finely adjust only the range of the rotation operation amount without changing the range of the rotation operation amount (for example, the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 which is the firing strength at which a ball is shot into the game area). The range from 66 degrees to 84 degrees can be changed to a range from 57 degrees to 75 degrees (see FIG. 10)). Therefore, when the launch intensity of the ball launched by the launch solenoid 142 deteriorates due to, for example, a change over time, the ball cannot be driven into the game area unless the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is set larger than the initially set range. However, by changing (fine-tuning) the DC voltage input from the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 by using the variable resistor VR3, the operation handle 51 becomes the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area. The range of the rotation operation amount can be finely adjusted to the initially set range.

  Further, by changing the resistance value of the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302, the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 can be changed (finely adjusted). As a result, the output voltage output from the operational amplifier OP2 of the adding circuit unit 303 to the voltage supply unit 304 can be changed (finely adjusted). Therefore, it is possible to change (finely adjust) the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 and change (finely adjust) the firing intensity of the sphere launched from the firing solenoid 142. Here, in general, the variable resistor has a simple configuration and is inexpensive as compared with a power supply circuit or the like configured by a complicated circuit. Therefore, it is possible to finely adjust the range of the operation amount of the operation handle 51 or the range width of the operation handle 51, which is the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area, using the variable resistor VR3 having a simple configuration and being inexpensive.

  Further, since the voltage applied to the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 is made constant by the Zener diode D1, it is assumed that the voltage value of the DC voltage supplied to the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 by the DC power source DC2 fluctuates. However, the DC voltage applied to the variable resistor VR3 becomes a stable and constant value. Therefore, the DC voltage input from the variable resistor VR3 to the resistor R3 of the adder circuit unit 303 can be stabilized. Thereby, the output voltage output from the operational amplifier OP2 of the adder circuit unit 303 to the voltage supply unit 304 can be stabilized, and the firing intensity of the sphere launched from the firing solenoid 142 can be stabilized. Accordingly, it is possible to stabilize the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 that provides the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area.

  Furthermore, the Zener diode D1 stabilizes the DC voltage input from the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303. In general, a Zener diode has a simple configuration and is inexpensive compared to a constant voltage circuit or the like configured by a complicated circuit. Therefore, the voltage value input from the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 is stabilized by using the Zener diode D1 having a simple configuration and is inexpensive, and a ball is driven into the game area. It is possible to stabilize the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 that becomes the firing intensity.

  Finally, as in the present embodiment, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the game board 13 is larger than the conventional pachinko machine, variations in the firing intensity are likely to occur in the balls launched from the firing solenoid 142. However, as described above, the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 adjusts the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 that is the firing strength at which the ball is shot into the game area, and the variable resistance of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 Even if the size of the game board 13 is increased by adjusting the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 which is the launch strength at which the ball is shot into the game area by the device VR2, the ball fired from the launch solenoid 142 is played. The range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 and the range width thereof can be adjusted so as to be driven into the region. Therefore, variation in the firing intensity of the spheres fired from the firing solenoid 142 can be reduced.

  Next, a pachinko machine according to a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko machine of the second embodiment is obtained by changing the launch control device 112 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment to another launch control device 300. The launch control device 300 of the second embodiment adds a handle monitoring unit 307, a voltage increase unit 308, and a limiter unit 309 to the launch control device 112 of the first embodiment, and the addition used in the first embodiment. The voltage adjustment unit 302 is omitted. Further, instead of the DC-DC converter CV1 of the voltage supply unit 304 used in the first embodiment, a DC-DC converter CV2 having a different voltage boosting degree is used, and a functional block using the DC-DC converter CV2 is changed. The second voltage supply unit 310 is used.

  According to the launch control apparatus 300 of the second embodiment, in addition to being able to adjust the range or range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into the game area, the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 can be adjusted. Is larger than the specified value (105 degrees in the present embodiment), the right-handed ball can be reliably fired and the firing strength of the right-handed ball can be made constant.

  FIG. 30 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the launch control apparatus 300 according to the second embodiment. In addition, the same number is attached | subjected to the part same as the launch control apparatus 112 of 1st Embodiment mentioned above in FIG. 8, the description is abbreviate | omitted, and only a different part is demonstrated.

  The handle monitoring unit 307 is a circuit that detects that the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than a specified value (105 degrees in the present embodiment), and the comparator OP4 used as a comparator and the resistance value are fixed. The three resistors R8, R9, and R10, a variable shunt regulator Reg1 used as a reference voltage source, a capacitor CD3, and a DC power source DC2 that supplies a DC voltage of 12 volts.

  The variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is connected to the negative input terminal (inverted input terminal) of the comparator OP4. The input is made to the minus input terminal (inverted input terminal) of the comparator OP4.

  On the other hand, one end of a resistor R8 is connected to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4, and a DC power source DC2 that supplies a DC voltage of 12 volts is connected to the other end of the resistor R8. . Further, one end of the resistor R9 is connected to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4, and one end of the resistor R10 is connected to the other end of the resistor R9. The other end of the resistor R10 is grounded. Further, the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4 includes the cathode of the variable shunt regulator Reg1, the plus terminal that is one end of the capacitor CD3, and the plus input terminal (non-inverting input) of the operational amplifier OP6 of the limiter unit 309 described later. Terminal) is connected. Here, the anode of the variable shunt regulator Reg1 and the other end of the capacitor CD3 are grounded, and the Ref terminal of the variable shunt regulator Reg1 is connected between the resistor R9 and the resistor R10. The capacitor CD3 is used for preventing oscillation of the variable shunt regulator Reg1.

  When a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power source DC2 to the resistor R8, a DC voltage is supplied to the variable shunt regulator Reg1, and a reference voltage is generated from the Ref terminal of the variable shunt regulator Reg1 (in this embodiment). , Approximately 2.45 volts). In general, the reference voltage by the variable shunt regulator is highly accurate. Since this highly accurate reference voltage is applied to the resistor R10 connected in parallel with the Ref terminal of the variable shunt regulator Reg1, the other end of the resistor R9 is connected to one end of the resistor R10 and the Ref terminal of the variable shunt regulator Reg1. Then, by connecting one end of the resistor R9 to the cathode of the variable shunt regulator Reg1, a highly accurate DC voltage is also applied to the resistor R9 and the resistor R10 (in this embodiment, about 3.85 volts). A highly accurate DC voltage applied to the resistor R9 and the resistor R10 is input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4.

  Here, the resistance R9 and the resistance R10 are integrated with the reference voltage (about 2.45 volts in this embodiment) applied to the resistance R10 to the value obtained by dividing the resistance value of the resistance R9 by the resistance value of the resistance R10. A DC voltage obtained by adding the DC voltage having the above value and the reference voltage (about 2.45 volts in this embodiment) applied to the resistor R10 is applied (about 3.85 in this embodiment). bolt).

  In this way, a highly accurate DC voltage (this is applied to the resistor R9 and the resistor R10, which is created using the reference voltage of the Ref terminal of the variable shunt regulator Reg1 (about 2.45 volts in the present embodiment). In the embodiment, by inputting approximately 3.85 volts) to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4, the DC voltage inputted to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4 is compared. The reference voltage is used, and the comparator OP4 functions as a comparator. In the present embodiment, about 3.85 volts is used as the comparison reference voltage, and this comparison reference voltage is generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is 105 degrees. DC voltage.

  When the player turns the operation handle 51 and the DC voltage (signal SA2) generated in the variable resistor VR1 according to the amount of the turning operation is input to the negative input terminal (inverted input terminal) of the comparator OP4. The comparator OP4 compares the DC voltage input to the negative input terminal (inverting input terminal) with the comparative DC voltage input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of about 3.85 volts. The DC voltage input to the negative input terminal (inverted input terminal) of the comparator OP4, that is, the DC voltage (signal SA2) generated in the variable resistor VR1 in accordance with the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is added to the comparator OP4. When the comparison DC voltage input to the input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) is about 3.85 volts or less (when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is 105 degrees or less), the output terminal of the comparator OP4 is high. It becomes an impedance state. On the other hand, the DC voltage input to the negative input terminal (inverted input terminal) of the comparator OP4, that is, the DC voltage (signal SA2) generated in the variable resistor VR1 in accordance with the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is positive input. When it is greater than about 3.85 volts, which is the comparative DC voltage input to the terminal (non-inverting input terminal) (when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is greater than 105 degrees), the output terminal of the comparator OP4 is zero volts. It becomes a state.

  The voltage increasing unit 308 inputs a DC voltage to the resistor R3 of the adding circuit unit 303, and adds when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than a specified value (105 degrees in the present embodiment). The circuit increases the voltage value of the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the circuit unit 303 to a predetermined value. The operational amplifier OP5 functions as a buffer amplifier, three resistors R11, R12, and R13 having fixed resistance values, and a reference A variable shunt regulator Reg2 used as a voltage source, a capacitor CD4, and a DC power source DC2 that supplies a DC voltage of 12 volts are configured.

  One end of a resistor R11 is connected to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP5, and a DC power source DC2 that supplies a DC voltage of 12 volts is connected to the other end of the resistor R11. Further, one end of a resistor R12 is connected to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP5, and one end of a resistor R13 is connected to the other end of the resistor R12. The other end of the resistor R13 is connected to the output terminal of the comparator OP4 of the handle monitoring unit 307. Further, the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP5 is connected to the positive terminal which is the cathode of the variable shunt regulator Reg2 and one end of the capacitor CD4. Here, the anode of the variable shunt regulator Reg2 and the other end of the capacitor CD4 are grounded, and the Ref terminal of the variable shunt regulator Reg2 is connected between the resistor R12 and the resistor R13. The capacitor CD4 is used for preventing oscillation of the variable shunt regulator Reg2. The resistor R11 is a resistor for limiting the current supplied from the DC power source DC2.

  Further, the negative input terminal (inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP5 and the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP5 are short-circuited, and are further connected to one end of the resistor R3 of the adder circuit section 303.

  A DC power supply DC2 that supplies a DC voltage of 12 volts is connected to the resistor R11, and a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC2. Further, the DC voltage input to the negative input terminal (inverted input terminal) of the comparator OP4 of the handle monitoring unit 307, that is, the DC voltage (signal SA2) generated in the variable resistor VR1 in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. ) Is about 3.85 volts or less, which is the comparative DC voltage input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4, the output terminal of the comparator OP4 is in a high impedance state. Therefore, most of the reference voltage (about 2.45 volts in the present embodiment) generated at the Ref terminal of the variable shunt regulator Reg2 is applied to the output terminal of the comparator OP4.

  Here, the DC voltage input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP5 will be described. The DC voltage (signal SA2) generated in the variable resistor VR1 according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is a comparative DC voltage input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4. In the case of 85 volts or less, the output terminal of the comparator OP4 is in a high impedance state. Therefore, most of the reference voltage (about 2.45 volts in the present embodiment) generated at the Ref terminal of the variable shunt regulator Reg2 is applied to the output terminal of the comparator OP4. Therefore, almost no voltage is applied to the resistors R12 and R13. Thus, the cathode voltage of the variable shunt regulator Reg2, that is, the DC voltage input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP5 is substantially the same as the reference voltage output from the Ref terminal of the variable shunt regulator Reg2. This is a voltage value (about 2.45 volts in this embodiment). A voltage substantially the same as the reference voltage output from the Ref terminal of the variable shunt regulator Reg2 (in this embodiment, approximately 2.45 volts) is input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP5, and the amplification degree Is approximately 1 and is output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP5. Therefore, a DC voltage of about 2.45 volts is input to the resistor R3 of the adder circuit unit 303.

  On the other hand, a DC voltage input to the negative input terminal (inverted input terminal) of the comparator OP4, that is, a DC voltage (signal SA2) generated in the variable resistor VR1 in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is a comparator OP4. When it is larger than the comparative DC voltage (about 3.85 volts in the present embodiment) input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal), the output terminal of the comparator OP4 is in a state of zero volts. In this case, since the other end of the resistor R13 is grounded, when a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power source DC2 to the resistor R11, the DC voltage is also supplied to the variable shunt regulator Reg2, and the variable shunt regulator A reference voltage is generated from the Ref terminal of Reg2 (about 2.45 volts in the present embodiment). Since the reference voltage by the variable shunt regulator Reg2 is applied to the resistor R13 connected in parallel with the Ref terminal of the variable shunt regulator Reg2, the other end of the resistor R12 is connected to one end of the resistor R13 and the Ref terminal of the variable shunt regulator Reg2. By connecting and connecting one end of the resistor R12 to the cathode of the variable shunt regulator Reg2, a high-precision DC voltage is also applied to the resistor R12 and the resistor R13 (in this embodiment, approximately 4.90 volts).

  Therefore, the resistance R12 and the resistance R13 (for the cathode of the variable shunt regulator Reg2) are values obtained by integrating the reference voltage applied to the resistance R13 to the value obtained by dividing the resistance value of the resistance R12 by the resistance value of the resistance R13. A DC voltage obtained by adding the DC voltage and the reference voltage applied to the resistor R13 is applied (in this embodiment, approximately 4.90 volts).

  The DC voltage of the cathode of the variable shunt regulator Reg2 (in this embodiment, about 4.90 volts) is input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP5, the amplification degree is approximately 1, and the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP5 Therefore, a DC voltage of about 4.90 volts is input to the resistor R3 of the adder circuit unit 303.

  In this way, the DC voltage input to the negative input terminal (inverted input terminal) of the comparator OP4 of the handle monitoring unit 307, that is, the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. When (signal SA2) is equal to or lower than the comparative DC voltage (about 3.85 volts in the present embodiment) input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4 (the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51) Is equal to or less than 105 degrees), the DC voltage input from the operational amplifier OP5 of the voltage raising unit 308 to the resistor R3 of the adding circuit unit 303 is about 2.45 volts. The DC voltage of about 2.45 volts is added to the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 by the adding circuit unit 303. Therefore, the voltage divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 is smaller than the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51, but this reduced voltage is reduced by the voltage increasing unit 308. It can be compensated by a DC voltage of about 2.45 volts input from the operational amplifier OP5 to the resistor R3 of the adder circuit section 303.

  On the other hand, the DC voltage input to the negative input terminal (inverted input terminal) of the comparator OP4 of the handle monitoring unit 307, that is, the DC voltage (signal SA2) generated in the variable resistor VR1 in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. ) Is greater than the comparative DC voltage (about 3.85 volts in the present embodiment) input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4 of the handle monitoring unit 307 (rotation of the operation handle 51). When the operation amount is greater than 105 degrees), the DC voltage input from the operational amplifier OP5 of the voltage raising unit 308 to the resistor R3 of the adding circuit unit 303 is about 4.90 volts.

  The limiter unit 309 is a circuit that limits the voltage value so that the DC voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310 does not exceed about 3.85 volts. , A diode D4 and a DC power source DC2 for supplying a DC voltage of 12 volts.

  The plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6 is connected to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4 of the handle monitoring unit 307, and as described above, the plus input terminal (non-inverting terminal) of the comparator OP4. Since the DC voltage of about 3.85 volts is applied to the inverting input terminal by the variable shunt regulator Reg1, the DC voltage of about 3.85 volts is also applied to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6. Is applied.

  One end of the resistor R14 is connected to the negative input terminal (inverted input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6, and the other end of the resistor R14 is connected to the positive input terminal (non-inverted input terminal) of the buffer amplifier OP3 of the second voltage supply unit 310. It is connected to the. The resistor R14 is used for the purpose of preventing the DC voltage overshoot limited by the operational amplifier OP6. The resistor R15 having a fixed resistance connected between the adder circuit unit 303 and the second voltage supply unit 310 is used for stabilizing the operation of the limiter unit 309 (for balance with the resistor R14). ing. Accordingly, the firing control device 300 may be configured by deleting both the resistor R14 and the resistor R15.

  The cathode of the diode D4 is connected to the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP6, and the anode of the diode D4 is connected to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the second voltage supply unit 310. Note that a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC2 to one end of the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier OP6, and the other end of the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier OP6 is grounded.

  The voltage value of the DC voltage input to the negative input terminal (inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6, that is, the voltage of the DC voltage input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the second voltage supply unit 310. When the value is about 3.85 volts or less, which is the voltage value of the DC voltage inputted to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6 (the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is 105 degrees or less). ), A DC voltage of 12 volts is output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP6. However, even if a 12-volt DC voltage is output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP6, since the conduction of the diode D4 is cut off, the output 12-volt DC voltage is all applied to the diode D4. Therefore, the voltage value of the DC voltage input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the second voltage supply unit 310 is the DC voltage input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6. Is less than 3.85 volts (when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is 105 degrees or less), the limiter unit 309 is connected to the positive input terminal of the operational amplifier OP3 of the second voltage supply unit 310 ( The voltage value of the DC voltage input to the non-inverting input terminal is not limited.

  On the other hand, the voltage value of the DC voltage input to the negative input terminal (inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6, that is, the DC voltage input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the second voltage supply unit 310. Is greater than about 3.85 volts, which is the voltage value of the DC voltage input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6 (the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is more than 105 degrees). When the voltage is large, the voltage at the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP6 is about 3.85 volts, which is the same as the DC voltage input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6. For this reason, the diode D4 becomes conductive, and the voltage value of the DC voltage input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the second voltage supply unit 310 drops. Therefore, the voltage value of the DC voltage input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the second voltage supply unit 310 drops. When the voltage value of the DC voltage input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the second voltage supply unit 310 is about 3.85 volts or less, the direct current of 12 volts from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP6. The voltage is output, the conduction of the diode D4 is interrupted, and the limitation on the voltage value of the DC voltage input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the second voltage supply unit 310 is interrupted.

  In this way, the limiter unit 309 limits the voltage value of the DC voltage input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the second voltage supply unit 310 so as not to exceed about 3.85 volts. doing.

  The second voltage supply unit 310 is a circuit that supplies a voltage to the firing solenoid 142, and includes an operational amplifier OP3, a low-pass filter F1, a DC-DC converter CV2 that is a booster, and a DC power source DC3 that supplies a DC voltage of 32 volts. And a capacitor CD2. The voltage supply unit 304 and the second voltage supply unit 310 of the first embodiment are different where the DC-DC converter CV1 is changed to the DC-DC converter CV2, but the DC-DC converter CV1 and the DC-DC converter are different. Only the voltage boosting degree is different from CV2. Therefore, since the operation of the voltage supply unit 304 and the second voltage supply unit 310 of the first embodiment is the same, a detailed description of the second voltage supply unit 310 is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31 and FIG. 32, operation | movement of the launch control apparatus 300 of 2nd Embodiment shown in FIG. 30 is demonstrated. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing the voltage change of each signal of the launch control apparatus 300 of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 30, and FIG. 32 is the voltage fluctuation of the launch control apparatus 300 of the second embodiment shown in FIG. It is the figure which showed the change of the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 at the time of changing the variable resistor VR2 of the adjustment part 301 (change of DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor | condenser CD2).

  First, with reference to FIG. 31, operation | movement of the launch control apparatus 300 of 2nd Embodiment shown in FIG. 30 is demonstrated. In FIG. 31, the horizontal axis represents the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and the vertical axis represents the voltage of each signal. The rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is set from the minimum value of zero degrees to the maximum value of 120 degrees, and a DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by the rotation operation of the operation handle 51, that is, When the signal SA2 is input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP1 in the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301, a signal having an amplification factor of approximately 1 is output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP1 (FIG. 30). When the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is zero degrees, the DC voltage value of the signal SA2 is about 0.7 volts, and when the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is 120 degrees, which is the maximum value, the signal The DC voltage value of SA2 is about 4.3 volts.

  Next, the signal output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP1 is divided by the variable resistor VR2, and the signal SB2, which is the divided DC voltage, is input to the resistor R2 of the adder circuit unit 303 (FIG. 30). When the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is zero degrees, the DC voltage value of the signal SB2 is about 0.20 volts, and when the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is 120 degrees, which is the maximum value, The DC voltage value of SB2 is about 1.15 volts.

  On the other hand, the DC voltage (signal SC2) generated at the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP5 of the voltage raising unit 308 is input to the resistor R3 of the adding circuit unit 303 (see FIG. 30). As described above with reference to FIG. 30, the signal SC2, which is a DC voltage generated at the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP5 of the voltage raising unit 308, is a DC voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. When the voltage value of the signal SA2, that is, the voltage value of the signal SA2 is about 3.85 volts or less (when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is from zero degrees to 105 degrees or less), the signal value becomes about 2.45 volts. When the voltage value of SA2 is greater than about 3.85 volts (when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is greater than 105 degrees and up to 120 degrees), it is about 4.90 volts.

  The signal SB2 input to the resistor R2 of the adder circuit unit 303 and the signal SC2 input to the resistor R3 of the adder circuit unit 303 are added (added) by the operational amplifier OP2, and output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP2. The signal is input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the second voltage supply unit 310 via the resistor R15 (see FIG. 30). Here, the DC voltage value input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the second voltage supply unit 310 is limited by the limiter circuit 309 so as not to exceed about 3.85 volts. .

  A signal input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 which is a buffer amplifier of the second voltage supply unit 310 is output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP3 with an amplification factor of approximately 1. The signal output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP3 has its noise component (high frequency component) removed by the low-pass filter F1, and is output as the signal SD2 from the output terminal of the low-pass filter F1 (see FIG. 30). When the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is zero degree, the DC voltage value of the signal SD2 is added to about 0.20 volts of the DC voltage value of the signal SB2 input to the resistor R2 of the adding circuit unit 303. When the DC operation of the signal SC2 input to the resistor R3 of the circuit unit 303 is about 2.67 volts added to the DC voltage value of about 2.45 volts, the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is 120 degrees. The signal SD2 has a DC voltage value of approximately 3.85 volts (the DC voltage value of the signal SB2 input to the resistor R2 of the adder circuit unit 303 is approximately 1.00 volts and the resistor R3 of the adder circuit unit 303). The DC voltage obtained by adding the DC voltage value of the signal SC2 input to the signal SC2 of about 4.90 volts is about 5.90 volts, but the signal that is the DC voltage output from the adder circuit unit 303 by the limiter unit 309. S The voltage value of 2 is limited so as not to exceed about 3.85 volts).

  The signal SD2 output from the output terminal of the low-pass filter F1 is input to the input terminal of the DC-DC converter CV2, boosted, and then applied to the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 (applied to the capacitor CD2). DC voltage Ec).

  Next, referring to FIG. 32, the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 when the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 of the firing control apparatus 300 of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 30 is changed. A change in the maximum value (change in the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2) will be described.

  In FIG. 32, the operation of the firing control device 300 of the second embodiment and the change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 when the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 is changed are shown. For the sake of clarity, the signal input to the variable resistor VR2 is divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 into the signal SB2 (FIG. 32 (a)), and FIG. 10 (b). Similarly to the above, the voltage input from the voltage increasing unit 308 to the adding circuit unit 303 is not performed by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 without dividing the signal input to the variable resistor VR2 (the signal SA2 is directly used as the signal SB2). Compared with the case where the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 is not generated (FIG. 32B).

  In FIG. 32, the horizontal axis represents the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and the vertical axis represents the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 (DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2). As shown in FIG. 32 (b), the voltage input to the variable resistor VR2 is not divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301, and the voltage increasing unit 308 is transferred to the resistor R3 of the adding circuit unit 303. When the input DC voltage is not generated, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 is about 4.5 when the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is changed from zero degree to 120 degrees. It varies from volts to about 28.5 volts. Further, the range of the foul sphere is a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 from zero degrees to less than 66 degrees, and the range of the right strike ball is a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 larger than 84 degrees to 120 degrees. Yes. Therefore, the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area where the winning opening is arranged is 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less, and the target value of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is 65 degrees is not included in the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 (66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less). Furthermore, the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area, which originally needs to be finely adjusted, is 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less. The width is 18 degrees. The foul sphere is a launching rail 142 (see FIG. 5) that does not reach the launching port 68a where the return ball preventing member 68 (see FIG. 2) is located because the launching force (launching strength) of the firing solenoid 142 is weak. It means a sphere returning to the side. The right-handed ball is a ball that has a strong launching force (launching strength) of the firing solenoid 142, moves along the rail 62 after being launched from the launching port 68a, and directly hits the return rubber 69 (see FIG. 2). Means.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32A, when the voltage of the signal input to the variable resistor VR2 is divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 to obtain the signal SB2, it is applied to the firing solenoid 142. The maximum value of the voltage E1 varies from about 17.1 volts to about 25.0 volts. In this case, the range of the foul sphere is a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 from zero degrees to less than 19 degrees, and the range of the right strike ball is a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 larger than 105 degrees to 120 degrees. ing. Therefore, the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into a game area where a prize opening or the like is disposed is 19 degrees or more and 105 degrees or less. Therefore, when the signal input to the variable resistor VR2 is divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 to obtain the signal SB2, the target value of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is 65 degrees. It is possible to adjust the range of the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 that is the launch intensity at which the ball is driven into the game area.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 32 (a), when the voltage input to the variable resistor VR2 is divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 to obtain the signal SB2, a ball is placed in the game area. The range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the angle is 19 degrees or more and 105 degrees or less, and the width of the range is 86 degrees.

  Therefore, in the case of FIG. 32A, compared to 18 degrees which is the range width of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 which is the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area in the case of FIG. In this case, the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, which is the strength of launching a ball into the game area, has increased by 68 degrees. Therefore, the voltage input to the variable resistor VR2 is not divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301, and the DC voltage input from the voltage increasing unit 308 to the resistor R3 of the adding circuit unit 303 is not generated. Compared to the case (see FIG. 32B), when the signal input to the variable resistor VR2 is divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 to obtain the signal SB2 (FIG. 32A). )) Since the range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area is widened, the firing strength of the ball for driving the ball into the game area can be finely adjusted.

  In addition, when the voltage input to the variable resistor VR2 is divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 to obtain the signal SB2 (FIG. 32A), the range of the right-handed ball is the operation range. The amount of rotation of the handle 51 is greater than 105 degrees and up to 120 degrees. At this time, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 is a voltage that can reliably fire the right-handed ball. The voltage is raised to about 25.0 volts by the voltage raising unit 308, and the voltage value is made constant by the limiter unit 309. Therefore, when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is greater than 105 degrees, the right hit ball can be reliably fired. Further, when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the limiter unit 309 even if the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is increased more than necessary. The maximum value is constant at about 25.0 volts. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 from becoming an overvoltage, deterioration of the firing solenoid 142 can be reduced. Further, since it is possible to prevent the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 from becoming an overvoltage, it is possible to prevent damage to the return rubber 69 and the like hit by the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is changed by changing the resistance value of the variable resistor VR1 based on the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. Change. Then, the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 that changes depending on the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301, and the divided DC voltage is supplied to the adding circuit unit 303. The DC voltage input to the resistor R2 and output from the voltage increasing unit 308 is input to the resistor R3 of the adding circuit unit 303. Then, a voltage obtained by adding the DC voltage divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 and the DC voltage output by the voltage increasing unit 308 is output from the adding circuit unit 303. Then, based on the output voltage output from the adder circuit unit 303, the second voltage supply unit 310 controls the launch intensity of the sphere launched from the launch solenoid 142.

  By dividing the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by the variable resistor VR2 according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51, the amount generated in the variable resistor VR2 according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The fluctuation range of the pressed voltage (difference between the minimum DC voltage value generated in the variable resistor VR2 and the maximum DC voltage value) is generated in the variable range of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 (variable resistor VR1). The difference can be made smaller than the difference between the minimum DC voltage value and the maximum DC voltage value. That is, the slope of the divided voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 (the straight line connecting the minimum value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 and the maximum value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 (signal SB1 in FIG. 9). ) Of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 (the minimum value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 and the maximum voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1). Compared to the straight line connecting the values (the slope of the signal SA1 in FIG. 9), the value can be reduced.

  Here, since the divided voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 becomes a voltage input to the resistor R2 of the adder circuit unit 303, a fluctuation range (slope) of the voltage input to the resistor R2 of the adder circuit unit 303 is obtained. In addition, the fluctuation range of the output voltage output from the operational amplifier OP2 of the adder circuit unit 303 (the slope of the signal SC1 in FIG. 9) can also be reduced. Then, as the fluctuation range (slope) of the output voltage output from the operational amplifier OP2 of the adder circuit unit 303 is reduced, the fluctuation range (slope) of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 is also reduced. . Since the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 for driving a ball into the game area is within a certain range (for example, 17.5 volts to 21.0 volts (see FIG. 11)), the voltage applied to the firing solenoid 142 By reducing the fluctuation range (tilt) of E1, it is possible to widen the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area (for example, the firing intensity at which the ball is driven into the game area). The amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is in the range of 66 degrees to 84 degrees, and the range width of 18 degrees can be set to a range of 23 degrees to 77 degrees (see FIG. 11). )). Accordingly, the range of the operation amount of the operation handle 51 can be adjusted so as to include, for example, 65 degrees that is the target value of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51.

  Note that the voltage divided by the variable resistor VR2 is smaller than the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. However, this reduced voltage can be compensated by a DC voltage input from the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303. Thereby, even if the variation range of the launch intensity of the sphere is reduced by the variable resistor VR2, the rotation of the operation handle 51 can be performed by increasing the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the adder circuit unit 303 by the variable resistor VR3. The launch intensity of the ball fired from the launch solenoid 142 with respect to the manipulated variable can be the launch intensity for driving the ball into the game area.

  Moreover, the range of the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 which becomes the firing strength at which a ball is driven into the game area can be changed to have a wide range width. In other words, it is possible to widen the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 that provides the firing strength with which the ball is driven into the game area. Therefore, it is possible to finely adjust the firing strength for driving a ball into the game area by the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51.

  Furthermore, the firing intensity of the sphere fired by the firing solenoid 142 is set to the DC voltage input from the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 to the resistor R2 of the adding circuit unit 303, and the operational amplifier OP5 of the voltage raising unit 308. Adjustment is made by the DC voltage input from the output terminal to the resistor R3 of the adder circuit section 303. In general, the direct current voltage is easy to finely and accurately adjust, and has a property that is resistant to change with time (not easily distorted), so the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 that provides the firing strength with which a ball is driven into the game area. Alternatively, the range width can be finely and accurately adjusted, and the adjustment can be made resistant to change with time (not easily distorted).

  Further, since the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 includes the variable resistor VR2, the DC voltage input from the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 to the resistor R2 of the adding circuit unit 303 can be changed (finely adjusted). Here, the DC voltage input from the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 to the resistor R2 of the adding circuit unit 303 may change from the initially set value due to a change with time of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 or the like. In this case, the output voltage output from the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 to the voltage supply unit 304 also changes as the DC voltage input from the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303 changes. To do. Then, since the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 also changes, the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area changes from the initially set range. . In addition, the range width of the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into the game area may be smaller than the initially set range width.

  In these cases, the voltage value input from the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 to the resistor R2 of the adding circuit unit 303 is changed (finely adjusted) by the variable resistor VR2, so that the operational amplifier OP2 of the adding circuit unit 303 supplies the voltage supply unit. The output voltage output to 304 can be changed (finely adjusted). Thereby, the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 can be changed (finely adjusted), and the firing intensity of the sphere launched from the firing solenoid 142 can be changed (finely adjusted). Therefore, the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 or the range width of the operation handle 51, which is the firing strength at which the ball is shot into the game area, can be changed (finely adjusted) to the initially set range or the initially set range width. it can.

  Further, the voltage value input from the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 to the resistor R2 of the adding circuit unit 303 is changed using the variable resistor VR2. Here, in general, the variable resistor has a simple configuration and is inexpensive as compared with a power supply circuit or the like configured by a complicated circuit. Therefore, it is possible to finely adjust the range of the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 or the range width of the operation handle 51 as the launching strength at which the ball is driven into the game area by using the variable resistor VR2 having a simple configuration and low cost.

  According to the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the comparator OP4 of the handle monitoring unit 307 includes the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 input to the negative input terminal (inverted input terminal) and the positive input terminal (non-inverted input). And 3.85 volts (a DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 when the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is 105 degrees), which is a comparison reference voltage input to the terminal. When the handle monitoring unit 307 detects that the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is greater than 105 degrees, the voltage increasing unit 308 supplies the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the adding circuit unit 303 to about 2.45. Raise from bolt to approximately 4.90 volts. When the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the adder circuit unit 303 is increased, the output voltage output from the adder circuit unit 303 is also increased, so that the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the second voltage supply unit 310 is increased. Can be raised to about 25.0 volts, which is a voltage value that can reliably fire a right-handed ball. Therefore, when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, it is possible to switch the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing solenoid 142 accurately and stably.

  In addition, the handle monitoring unit 307 detects a case where the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is greater than 105 degrees, and a variable resistor that is input to the negative input terminal (reverse input terminal) by the comparator OP4 of the handle monitoring unit 307. The direct current voltage generated at VR1 and the comparison reference voltage input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) are about 3.85 volts (when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is 105 degrees, This is done by comparing with the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1. In general, a DC voltage is accurate and has a property that is resistant to change with time (not easily distorted). Therefore, the handle monitoring unit 307 can accurately detect a case where the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is greater than 105 degrees, and can make the detection more resistant to change with time (hard to go wrong).

  Further, a comparison reference voltage of about 3.85 volts input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4 of the handle monitoring unit 307 is connected in parallel to the variable shunt regulator Reg1 and the variable shunt regulator Reg1. A constant voltage value is obtained by a circuit including resistors R9 and R10 and a capacitor CD3 connected in parallel to the variable shunt regulator Reg1. Accordingly, the comparator OP4 of the handle monitoring unit 307 causes the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by the turning operation of the operation handle 51 input to the minus input terminal (inverted input terminal) and the plus input terminal (non-inverted input). Comparison with a reference voltage of about 3.85 volts (a DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 when the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is 105 degrees), Accurate and stable. Therefore, the comparator OP4 of the handle monitoring unit 307 determines that when the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is greater than about 3.85 volts, which is the comparison reference voltage, that is, the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is greater than 105 degrees. Case detection can be performed accurately and stably. Here, a circuit generally composed of a variable shunt regulator is simple and inexpensive compared to a constant voltage circuit composed of a complicated circuit. Therefore, a circuit constituted by the variable shunt regulator Reg1, which is simple and inexpensive, the resistors R9 and R10 connected in parallel to the variable shunt regulator Reg1, and the capacitor CD3 connected in parallel to the variable shunt regulator Reg1. By using this, it is possible to accurately and stably detect the case where the operation amount of the operation handle 51 performed by the comparator OP4 of the handle monitoring unit 307 is larger than 105 degrees.

  When the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is greater than 105 degrees, the voltage booster 308 supplies the DC voltage input from the operational amplifier OP5 of the voltage booster 308 to the resistor R3 of the adder circuit 303 by about 2. It is possible to switch accurately and stably from 45 volts to about 4.90 volts. Thereby, the DC voltage output from the adder circuit unit 303 and input to the second voltage supply unit 310 can also be switched accurately and stably. Therefore, when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, it is possible to accurately and stably switch the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing solenoid 142.

  When the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is greater than 105 degrees, the DC voltage input from the operational amplifier OP5 of the voltage booster 308 to the resistor R3 of the adder circuit 303 is about 2.45 volts to about 4.90. Switch to bolts. Here, when the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the adder circuit unit 303 is about 4.90 volts, the DC voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310 is sent from the launch solenoid 142 through the launch port 68a. It is set so that the ball fired through the rail 62 moves along the rail 62 and has a firing strength that reaches the return rubber 69. That is, when the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the adding circuit unit 303 is about 4.90 volts, the DC voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310 is the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142. Is set to be approximately 25.0 volts, which is a voltage value capable of reliably firing a right-handed ball. Therefore, when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the ball launched from the firing solenoid 142 to the game area can be reliably hit along the rail 62 and hit the rubber 69. Can be played reliably.

  The operational amplifier OP6 of the limiter unit 309 has an output terminal connected to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the second voltage supply unit 310, and the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) is also connected to the resistor R14. Is connected to the negative terminal (inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the second voltage supply unit 310. The positive reference terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6 receives about 3.85 volts as a comparison reference voltage, that is, the DC voltage of the cathode terminal of the variable shunt regulator Reg1 of the handle monitoring unit 307. . Here, the operational amplifier OP6 inputs the DC voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310 to the minus terminal (inverting input terminal), and inputs the DC voltage and the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6. The comparison reference voltage (approximately 3.85 volts) is compared. When the DC voltage input to the negative terminal (inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6 becomes greater than about 3.85 volts, the limiter unit 309 causes the DC voltage to be input to the second voltage supply unit 310. Limiting is started and the DC voltage of the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP6 is limited to about 3.85 volts. Therefore, the limiter unit 309 starts to limit the DC voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310 (DC voltage input to the negative terminal (inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6), and the limiter unit 309 includes the first limiter unit 309. The DC voltage that limits the voltage input to the two-voltage supply unit 310 (the DC voltage at the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP6) has the same voltage value. As a result, the limiter unit 309 uses both the DC voltage that starts limiting the DC voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310 and the DC voltage that limits the voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310 as 1 The voltage can be determined by the DC voltage of the cathode terminal of the variable shunt regulator Reg1 (approximately 3.85 volts which is a comparison reference voltage). Therefore, the limiter unit 309 uniformly sets and changes the DC voltage that starts limiting the DC voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310 and the DC voltage that limits the voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310. It can be carried out. In addition, the limiter unit 309 starts the limitation of the DC voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310 (the DC voltage input to the negative terminal (inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6), and the limiter unit 309 includes the first limiter unit 309. 2 together with a DC voltage (a DC voltage at the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP6) for limiting the voltage input to the voltage supply unit 310, a DC voltage at the cathode terminal of one variable shunt regulator Reg1 (approximately 3. 85 volts). Therefore, the dedicated power source required for the limiter unit 309 to limit the DC voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310 can be eliminated.

  Here, as shown in the above Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2000-202094, in the conventional ball launcher, the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob are misaligned, and the position where the solenoid pier collides with the sphere. The launch strength of the ball is weakened by the deviation, and even when the operation amount of the operation handle is maximized, the ball is placed on, for example, a return rubber (see FIG. 2) disposed at the right end of the game area where the ball fired by the solenoid flows down. There was a problem that it was not possible to win and a normal game could not be performed.

  On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine of the second embodiment, when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the limiter unit 309 can increase the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 more than necessary. The DC voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310 is limited to a constant value of about 3.85 volts. Here, when the DC voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310 is set to about 3.85 volts, the ball launched from the launch solenoid 142 through the launch port 68a moves along the rail 62 and returns. The firing intensity reaches the rubber 69. That is, when the DC voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310 is set to about 3.85 volts, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 is a voltage that can reliably fire the right-handed ball. The value is set to about 25.0 volts. Therefore, when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the ball launched from the firing solenoid 142 to the game area is a right-handed ball and is reliably hit against the rubber 69 along the rail 62. It is possible to play normal games with certainty. Further, when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the limiter unit 309 even if the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is increased more than necessary. The maximum value is constant at about 25.0 volts. Therefore, since the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 can be prevented from becoming an overvoltage, it is possible to prevent damage to the return rubber 69 and the like hit by the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142.

  Next, a pachinko machine according to a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine of the third embodiment is obtained by changing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, the range or range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into the game area is set to a voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301, an addition voltage adjustment unit 302, and an addition circuit unit 303 using an electronic circuit. In the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment, the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 executes the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into the game area or the range width thereof. Adjustment is performed by the start-up process (see FIG. 35) and the firing control process (see FIG. 37).

  According to the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, the range or range width of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into the game area can be adjusted widely (see FIG. 44 (a)). On the other hand, depending on the case, the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into the game area or the range width thereof can be adjusted narrowly.

  FIG. 33 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment. In addition, the same number is attached | subjected to the part same as the pachinko machine 10 of 1st Embodiment mentioned above in FIG. 7, the description is abbreviate | omitted, and only a different part is demonstrated.

  The A / D converter 501 is an analog-digital converter that converts a DC voltage (analog value) generated in the variable resistor VR1 into a digital value and outputs the converted digital value to the input / output port 205. The A / D converter 501 has an input terminal (analog input terminal) connected to the variable resistor VR1 built in the operation handle 51, and an output terminal (digital output terminal) connected to the input / output port 205.

  The A / D converter 502 is an analog-digital converter that converts a DC voltage (analog value) generated in the variable resistor VR2 into a digital value and outputs the converted digital value to the input / output port 205. The A / D converter 502 has an input terminal (analog input terminal) connected to the variable resistor VR2 provided on the operation knob 122a, and an output terminal (digital output terminal) connected to the input / output port 205.

  The A / D converter 503 is an analog-digital converter that converts a DC voltage (analog value) generated in the variable resistor VR3 into a digital value and outputs the converted digital value to the input / output port 205. The A / D converter 503 has an input terminal (analog input terminal) connected to the variable resistor VR3 provided on the operation knob 122b, and an output terminal (digital output terminal) connected to the input / output port 205.

  The operation handle 51 is an operation member for adjusting the firing strength of a ball that is driven into the front surface of the game board 13. The variable resistor VR1 built in the operation handle 51 is connected to the input / output port 205 via the A / D converter 501. Therefore, when the resistance value of the variable resistor VR1 changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the player's operation handle 51, a DC voltage corresponding to the change in the resistance value is generated in the variable resistor VR1. A DC voltage (analog value) is input to the A / D converter 501. The input DC voltage is converted into a digital value by the A / D converter 501 and output to the input / output port 205. As a result, the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is input to the main controller 110 as a digital value.

  The operation knob 122a is an operator for adjusting a magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 input to the input / output port 205 by a positive real number. The operation knob 122a is provided with a variable resistor VR2 and a 5-volt DC power source DC1. One end of the variable resistor VR2 is connected to a DC power source DC1 of 5 volts, and the other end of the variable resistor VR2 is grounded. The variable resistor VR2 is connected to the input / output port 205 via the A / D converter 502. Therefore, when the operation knob 122a is operated, the resistance value of the variable resistor VR2 changes, and a DC voltage corresponding to the change in the resistance value is generated in the variable resistor VR2. When the DC voltage (analog value) generated in the variable resistor V2 is input to the A / D converter 502, the input DC voltage is converted into a digital value by the A / D converter 502, and the input / output port. It is output to 205. Thereby, the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 is input to the main controller 110 as a digital value.

  The operation knob 122b is an operator for adjusting a DC voltage applied to the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 input to the input / output port 205. The operation knob 122b is provided with a variable resistor VR3 and a 5-volt DC power source DC1. One end of the variable resistor VR3 is connected to a DC power source DC1 of 5 volts, and the other end of the variable resistor VR3 is grounded. The variable resistor VR3 is connected to the input / output port 205 via the A / D converter 503. Therefore, when the operation knob 122b is operated, the resistance value of the variable resistor VR3 changes, and a DC voltage corresponding to the change in the resistance value is generated in the variable resistor VR3. When the DC voltage (analog value) generated in the variable resistor V3 is input to the A / D converter 503, the input DC voltage is converted into a digital value by the A / D converter 503, and the input / output port It is output to 205. Thereby, the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 is input to the main controller 110 as a digital value.

  The signal conversion circuit 241 is built in the launch control device 400. The signal conversion circuit 241 is based on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is off (not operated). In addition, the firing permission signal SG3 is output to the input / output port 205. The firing permission signal SG3 input to the input / output port 205 is input to the main controller 110.

  The D / A converter 504 converts the fire application voltage Eα (digital value) output from the input / output port 205 into an analog value, and outputs the converted analog value to the fire control device 400 as the fire application voltage Eα. It is an analog converter. The D / A converter 504 has an input terminal (digital input terminal) connected to the input / output port 205 and an output terminal (analog output terminal) connected to the firing control device 400.

  When the firing permission signal SG3 is input to the main control device 110, the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 fires the firing applied voltage Eα (digital value), the firing control signal α, and the ball feed control signal β from the input / output port 205. The data is output to the control device 400 via the input / output port 205. The output firing application voltage Eα (digital value) is converted to an analog firing application voltage Eα by the D / A converter 504, and the firing solenoid 142 is converted by the converted firing application voltage Eα and the firing control signal α. Fire a ball toward the game zone. Further, the ball feed solenoid 154 arranges a ball on the front surface of the cap 142b (see FIGS. 5B and 6B) covering the tip of the plunger 142a of the firing solenoid 142 by the output ball feed control signal β. To do.

  The magnification determination table memory 202a is a memory for storing a magnification determination table for determining a magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 input to the input / output port 205 by a positive real number. When the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 of the operation knob 122a is read by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, the MPU 201 corrects the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 according to the DC voltage. Is determined by a magnification determination table.

  The offset voltage determination table memory 202b determines a DC voltage (hereinafter referred to as “offset voltage”) to be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 input to the input / output port 205 by a positive real number. It is a memory for storing an offset voltage determination table. When the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 of the operation knob 122b is read by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, the MPU 201 corrects the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 according to the DC voltage. The offset voltage to be added to the voltage multiplied by the real number is determined by the offset voltage determination table.

  The magnification memory 203a is a memory for storing the determined magnification when the MPU 201 determines a magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number. When a DC voltage is generated in the variable resistor VR2 of the operation knob 122a and the generated DC voltage is read into the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the process of S1401 of the startup process shown in FIG. In accordance with the direct current voltage, the MPU 201 determines a magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number by the magnification determination table in the process of S1402 of the startup process. The determined magnification to be multiplied by a positive real number is stored in the magnification memory 203a.

  The offset voltage memory 203b is a memory that stores the determined offset voltage when the MPU 201 determines an offset voltage to be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number. is there. When a DC voltage is generated in the variable resistor VR3 of the operation knob 122b, and the generated DC voltage is read into the main controller 110 in the process of S1403 of the startup process shown in FIG. In accordance with the voltage, the MPU 201 determines an offset voltage to be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number in the process of S1404 of the start-up process using the offset voltage determination table. The determined offset voltage is stored in the offset voltage memory 203b.

  Next, the firing control device 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the launch control device 400. Note that the launch control device 400 is obtained by changing the electrical configuration of the launch control device 112 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. The launch control device 400 omits the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301, the addition voltage adjustment unit 302, and the addition circuit unit 303 that are used in the launch control device 112, and adds a positive input terminal (non-display) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the voltage supply unit 304. Inverted input terminal) is connected to the input / output port 205. Moreover, the launch control device 400 has a configuration in which a signal conversion circuit 241 is incorporated. In the description of FIG. 34, the same parts as those in the firing control apparatus 112 of the first embodiment described above with reference to FIG. 8 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted. Only different parts will be described.

  When the firing application voltage Eα is output from the input / output port 205 and the output firing application voltage Eα is input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the voltage supply unit 304, the firing application voltage Eα is obtained. From the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP3, it is output with an amplification factor of approximately 1. The noise component (high frequency component) is removed from the voltage output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP3 by the low-pass filter F1, and the voltage is output from the output terminal of the low-pass filter F1.

  The voltage output from the output terminal of the low-pass filter F1 is input to the input terminal of the DC-DC converter CV1, boosted, and then becomes the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2. As a result, the electric charge determined by the product of the capacitance of the capacitor CD2 and the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2 is stored in the capacitor CD2. Note that a voltage E1 (maximum value Ec volts) is applied to the firing solenoid 142 in accordance with the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD2.

  Next, referring to FIG. 35, the process of determining the magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number and the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 are described. A process for determining an offset voltage to be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the positive real number by a positive real number will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment. The start-up process shown in FIG. 35 occurs in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 between the process of S112 and the process of S113 of the start-up process of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. A process for determining a magnification for multiplying the voltage being positive by a real number and a process for determining an offset voltage to be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number (the processes of S1401 to S1404) ) Is added. Therefore, the same parts as those in the start-up process of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above with reference to FIG. 17 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted. Only different parts will be described.

  In the start-up process of the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment, after the initialization of the RAM 203 (S112), the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 of the operation knob 122a is read (S1401), and the read variable resistor VR2 is read. Is determined from the magnification determination table stored in the magnification determination table memory 202a using the DC voltage generated at the magnification, and the magnification at which the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is multiplied by a positive real number is determined. It is stored in the magnification memory 203a (S1402).

  As described above, the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment reads the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 in the start-up process (S1401), and the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is multiplied by a positive real number. Since the magnification to be determined is determined (S1402), it is not necessary to read the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 after the start-up process of the pachinko machine of the third embodiment. Therefore, even after the start-up process, compared to a pachinko machine that reads a DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2, a launch control process (see FIG. 36 described later) that controls the launch intensity of a sphere launched by the launch solenoid 142. The time spent for the process of S1501) can be reduced, and the launch control process can be speeded up.

  The pachinko machine according to the third embodiment reads the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 during the start-up process (S1401), and multiplies the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. (S1402), even if the control knob 122a changes from the set position during the game and the resistance value of the variable resistor VR2 changes, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is multiplied by a positive real number. There is no change in magnification. Therefore, it can be prevented that the operation knob 122a is changed from the set position during the game and the firing intensity of the ball fired by the firing solenoid 142 is changed.

  Here, the magnification determination table stored in the magnification determination table memory 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing the contents of the magnification determination table memory 202a. The magnification determination table stored in the magnification determination table memory 202a has a ratio of multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number in accordance with the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2. It is a table for determining by MPU201.

  The magnification determination table stored in the magnification determination table memory 202a is generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 in accordance with the voltage change (from zero volts to 5 volts) generated in the variable resistor VR2. The magnification for multiplying the direct current voltage to a positive real number is set from zero to 2.0 times.

  Therefore, if the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 read in the startup process S1401 shown in FIG. 35 is, for example, zero volts, the MPU 201 controls the operation handle in the startup process S1402. The magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the 51 variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number is determined to be “zero”. When the magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number is determined to be “zero”, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is multiplied by zero. The That is, a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number is zero volts.

  If the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 read in the startup process S1401 is 5.0 volts, for example, the MPU 201 controls the operation handle 51 in the startup process S1402. The magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 incorporated in the positive resistor by a positive real number is determined to be “2.0”. When the magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number is determined to be “2.0”, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is 2 It is multiplied by 0.

  Note that the firing applied voltage Eα output from the input / output port 205 to the firing control device 400 is set from zero volts to 5.0 volts, so the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is positive. If it exceeds 5.0 volts when the real number is multiplied, the MPU 201 sets the firing applied voltage Eα to 5.0 volts regardless of the multiplication factor of the positive real number determined in S1402 of the start-up process shown in FIG. And output from the input / output port 205 to the firing control device 400.

  Returning to the description of the start-up process shown in FIG. After executing the process of S1402, the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 of the operation knob 122b is read (S1403), and the offset voltage determination table memory 202b is used using the DC voltage generated in the read variable resistor VR3. The offset voltage to be added to the voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number is determined from the offset voltage determination table stored in the operation handle 51 and stored in the offset voltage memory 203b (S1404). After the process of S1404, the process proceeds to S113.

  As described above, the pachinko machine of the third embodiment reads the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 in the start-up process (S1403), and uses the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51. Since the offset voltage to be added to the positive real number multiplied voltage is determined (S1404), it is not necessary to read the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 after the start-up process of the pachinko machine of the third embodiment. Therefore, even after the start-up process, compared to a pachinko machine that reads a DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3, a launch control process (see FIG. 36 described later) that controls the launch intensity of a sphere launched by the launch solenoid 142. The time spent for the process of S1501) can be reduced, and the launch control process can be speeded up.

  Further, the pachinko machine of the third embodiment reads the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 in the start-up process (S1403), and the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is positive. Since the offset voltage to be added to the voltage multiplied by the real number is determined (S1404), even if the operation knob 122b changes from the set position during the game and the resistance value of the variable resistor VR3 changes, it occurs in the variable resistor VR1. The offset voltage applied to the voltage obtained by multiplying the current voltage by a positive real number does not change. Therefore, it can be prevented that the operation knob 122b is changed from the set position during the game and the firing intensity of the ball fired by the firing solenoid 142 is changed.

  Here, the offset voltage determination table stored in the offset voltage determination table memory 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing the contents of the offset voltage determination table memory 202b. The offset voltage determination table stored in the offset voltage determination table memory 202b generates, in the variable resistor VR3, an offset voltage that is added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number. It is a table for determining by MPU201 according to the voltage which is.

  The offset voltage determination table stored in the offset voltage determination table memory 202b is generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 in accordance with a change in the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 (from zero volts to 5 volts). The offset voltage applied to the voltage obtained by multiplying the current voltage by a positive real number is set from -2.8 volts to +2.8 volts.

  Therefore, if the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 read in the startup process S1403 shown in FIG. 35 is, for example, zero volts, the MPU 201 controls the operation handle in the startup process S1404. The offset voltage applied to the voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of 51 by a positive real number is determined to be “−2.8 volts”. When the offset voltage applied to the voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number is determined to be “−2.8 volts”, the voltage is generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51. “−2.8 volts” is added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage being positive by a real number.

  If the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 read in the startup process S1403 is, for example, 2.5 volts, the MPU 201 controls the operation handle 51 in the startup process S1404. An offset voltage to be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number is determined to be “zero volts”. When the offset voltage applied to the voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number is determined to be “zero volts”, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is determined. "Zero volts" is added to the positive real multiple of voltage. That is, nothing can be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number.

  Furthermore, if the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 read in the startup process S1403 is, for example, 5.0 volts, the MPU 201 controls the operation handle 51 in the startup process S1404. An offset voltage to be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number is determined to be “2.8 volts”. When the offset voltage applied to the voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number is determined to be “2.8 volts”, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is generated. "2.8 volts" is added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage that is present by a positive real number.

  As described above, the firing applied voltage Eα output from the input / output port 205 to the firing control device 400 is set from zero volts to 5.0 volts, and thus is generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51. When the offset voltage is added to the voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage by a positive real number and exceeds 5.0 volts, the MPU 201 applies the firing application regardless of the offset voltage determined in the process of S1404 of the start-up process shown in FIG. The voltage Eα is set to 5.0 volts and output from the input / output port 205 to the firing control device 400.

  35, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is multiplied by a positive real number and the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 An offset voltage to be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying a certain voltage by a positive real number can be determined.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a process for outputting the firing applied voltage Eα to the firing control apparatus 400 and a process for outputting the firing control signal α and the ball feed control signal β to the firing control apparatus 400 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment. The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 36 is performed by using the launch control process of the timer interrupt process of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. Is changed to a process for outputting the firing applied voltage Eα to the firing control device 400, and after the launch control processing (S1501), the launch control signal α and the ball feed control signal β are sent to the launch control device 400. This is a process to which control signal processing (S1502) to be output is added. Therefore, the same parts as those in the start-up process of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above with reference to FIG. 21 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted. Only different parts will be described.

  In the timer interruption process, after the start winning process (S504) is executed, a firing control process (S1501) for outputting the firing applied voltage Eα from the input / output port 205 to the firing control device 400 is executed. After executing this launch control process, a control signal process (S1502) for outputting the launch control signal α and the ball feed control signal β from the input / output port 205 to the launch control device 400 is executed, and this timer interrupt process ends.

  Here, the launch control process (S1501) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the launch control process (S1501) of the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment. In the firing control process, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is multiplied by a positive real number, and an offset voltage is added to the positive real number multiplied voltage to obtain a firing applied voltage Eα to the firing control device 400. It is a process to output.

  In the firing control process (S1501), first, it is determined whether or not the firing permission signal SG3 output from the signal conversion circuit 241 in the firing control device 400 is input (S1601), and the firing permission signal SG3 must be input. If this is the case (S1601: No), this launch control process (S1501) is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the firing permission signal SG3 is input (S1601: Yes), the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is read (S1604) and multiplied by the positive real number stored in the magnification memory 203a. Based on the magnification, the read voltage of the variable resistor VR1 is multiplied by a positive real number (S1605).

  After executing the process of S1605, based on the offset voltage stored in the offset voltage memory 203b, the offset voltage is added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number (S1606), The voltage obtained by adding the offset voltage is output to the firing control device 400 as the firing applied voltage Eα (S1607), and this firing control process (S1501) is terminated.

  By this firing control process (S1501), the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is multiplied by a positive real number, and an offset voltage is added to the positive real number multiplied voltage to obtain a firing applied voltage Eα. The firing applied voltage Eα can be output to the firing control device 400.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 41, the change of the voltage by the process of S1604-S1607 of the discharge control process (S1501) shown in FIG. 37 is demonstrated. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing changes in voltages when the firing control process shown in FIG. 37 is executed. In FIG. 41, the magnification for multiplying the positive real number stored in the magnification memory 203a is about 0.36. The offset voltage stored in the offset voltage memory 203b is about 2.25 volts.

  In FIG. 41, the horizontal axis represents the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and the vertical axis represents voltage. As shown in FIG. 41, the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is set from the minimum value of zero degrees to the maximum value of 120 degrees, and as shown in FIG. The DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 changes from about 0.7 volts to about 4.30 volts, and the amount of change is about 3.60 volts. The voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is read into the MPU 201 by the process of S1604 of the launch control process (S1501) shown in FIG. 37, and is stored in the magnification memory 203a by the process of S1605 of the launch control process. When the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is multiplied by the positive real number based on the magnification to be multiplied by the positive real number (about 0.36 in the pachinko machine of the third embodiment), as shown in FIG. In addition, a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number changes from about 0.25 volts to about 1.55 volts, and the amount of change is about 1.30 volts.

  Therefore, by changing the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 to a positive real number with a magnification smaller than 1.0, the amount of change in voltage compared to the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1. Can be reduced. In the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment, the positive real number magnification stored in the magnification memory 203a is about 0.36, but the positive real number magnification stored in the magnification memory 203a is, for example, 1 When the magnification is about 1.1, which is larger than 0.0, the voltage generated by the variable resistor VR1 is a positive real number multiplied by about 0.77 volts to about 4.73 volts. The amount of change is about 3.96 volts. Therefore, the amount of change in voltage is increased by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number by a factor larger than 1.0, compared with the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1. Can do.

  Based on the offset voltage (about 2.25 volts in the pachinko machine of the third embodiment) stored in the offset voltage memory 203b in the process of S1606 of the launch control process (S1501) shown in FIG. When an offset voltage is added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number, a voltage generated by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number is obtained, as shown in FIG. The voltage to which the offset voltage is added changes from about 2.50 volts to about 3.80 volts, and the amount of change is the amount of change in voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. The same is about 1.30 volts. Therefore, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is multiplied by the positive real number without changing the change amount of the voltage generated by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by the positive real number by the offset voltage. And the voltage can be used as the firing applied voltage Eα input to the firing control device 400.

  In the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, the offset voltage stored in the offset voltage memory 203b is about 2.25 volts, but the offset voltage stored in the offset voltage memory 203b is adjusted by the variable resistor VR3. For example, when the voltage is -0.25 volts, a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number changes from about zero volts to about 1.30 volts. Therefore, if the offset voltage is negative, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is a positive real number without changing the amount of change in the voltage generated by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. By reducing the voltage value of the doubled voltage, the voltage can be used as the firing applied voltage Eα input to the firing control device 400.

  In the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment, the offset voltage stored in the offset voltage memory 203b is about 2.25 volts, but the offset voltage stored in the offset voltage memory 203b is adjusted by the variable resistor VR3. For example, when the voltage is set to zero volts, a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number changes from about 0.25 volts to about 1.55 volts. Therefore, if the offset voltage is set to zero volts, the firing applied voltage Eα input to the firing control device 400 is obtained without adding the offset voltage to the voltage generated by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. be able to.

  As described above, by changing the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by the firing control process (S1501) shown in FIG. 37, the firing applied voltage Eα output to the firing control device 400 is adjusted. Can do. A voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 is determined by the adjusted firing application voltage Eα.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 42, the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 when the variable resistor VR3 is adjusted to set the offset voltage to a positive voltage will be described. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a change in the maximum value of voltage E1 applied to firing solenoid 142 (change in DC voltage Ec applied to capacitor CD2) when the offset voltage is a positive voltage. In FIG. 42, the following conditions are used in order to clarify the change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142.

  The voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is multiplied by 1.0 by adjusting the variable resistor VR2, and the variable resistor VR3 is adjusted to a voltage multiplied by 1.0 to obtain a positive offset voltage. When added (FIG. 42 (a)), the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted to 1.0 by adjusting the variable resistor VR2, and the voltage is changed to 1.0 times that voltage. The comparison is made with the case where the offset voltage by the resistor VR3 is not applied (the offset voltage is set to zero volts) (FIG. 42B).

  Here, FIG. 42B shows a case where the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is set as the firing applied voltage Eα that is input to the firing control device 400 as it is. Therefore, this comparison reveals a change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 (change in the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2) when the offset voltage is applied as a positive voltage.

  In FIG. 42, the horizontal axis represents the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51, and the vertical axis represents the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 (DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2). Here, when the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 becomes less than 17.5 volts, the ball launched by the firing solenoid 142 becomes a foul ball. When the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 is greater than 21.0 volts, the ball launched by the firing solenoid 142 becomes a right-handed ball. The foul sphere is a launching rail 142 (see FIG. 5) that does not reach the launching port 68a where the return ball preventing member 68 (see FIG. 2) is located because the launching force (launching strength) of the firing solenoid 142 is weak. It means a sphere returning to the side. The right-handed ball is a ball that has a strong launching force (launching strength) of the firing solenoid 142, moves along the rail 62 after being launched from the launching port 68a, and directly hits the return rubber 69 (see FIG. 2). Means.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (b), the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted by multiplying the variable resistor VR2 by 1.0, and the variable resistor is increased to 1.0 times the voltage. When the offset voltage by VR3 is not applied (the offset voltage is set to zero), the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 is changed when the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is changed from zero degrees to 120 degrees. The maximum value varies from about 4.5 volts to about 28.5 volts. Further, the range of the foul sphere is a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 from zero degrees to less than 66 degrees, and the range of the right strike ball is a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 larger than 84 degrees to 120 degrees. Yes. Therefore, the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into a game area where a prize opening or the like is provided is 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less. Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 42, the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 which is the firing strength at which a ball is driven into the game area is normally set to 65 degrees which is a target value of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. It is set within an arbitrary range.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 42 (b), the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted to 1.0 times by adjusting the variable resistor VR2, and the voltage is changed to 1.0 times that voltage. When the offset voltage by the resistor VR3 is not applied (the offset voltage is set to zero), the target value of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is 65 degrees, which is the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 described above. It is not included in (66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less), and a ball cannot be driven into the game area at a target value of 65 degrees, which is the target value of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Therefore, it is necessary to adjust the firing intensity of the sphere (the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142, that is, the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2) with respect to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 42A, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted by multiplying the variable resistor VR2 by 1.0, and the voltage multiplied by 1.0 When a positive offset voltage is applied to the variable resistor VR3, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 when the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is changed from zero degrees to 120 degrees. Can be varied from about 6.0 volts to about 30.0 volts. Further, the range of the foul ball is a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 from zero degrees to less than 57 degrees, and the range of the right hit ball is a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 larger than 75 degrees to 120 degrees. Yes. Therefore, the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into a game area where a winning opening or the like is disposed is 57 degrees or more and 75 degrees or less. Therefore, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted by multiplying the variable resistor VR2 by 1.0, and the variable resistor VR3 is adjusted to a voltage multiplied by 1.0 to obtain a positive offset. When the voltage is applied, the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is adjusted so as to include the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area so as to include the target value of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 of 65 degrees. Can do.

  Next, the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 when the offset voltage is set to a negative voltage by adjusting the variable resistor VR3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a change in the maximum value of voltage E1 applied to firing solenoid 142 (change in DC voltage Ec applied to capacitor CD2) when the offset voltage is a negative voltage. In FIG. 43, the following conditions are used in order to clarify the change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142.

  The voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted by multiplying the variable resistor VR2 by 1.0, and the variable resistor VR3 is adjusted to 1.0 times the negative voltage by adjusting the variable resistor VR2. When added (FIG. 43 (a)), the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted to 1.0 by adjusting the variable resistor VR2, and the voltage is changed to 1.0 times that voltage. The comparison is made with the case where the offset voltage by the resistor VR3 is not applied (the offset voltage is set to zero) (FIG. 43B). Here, FIG. 43B shows a case where the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is set as the firing applied voltage Eα that is input to the firing control device 400 as it is. Therefore, this comparison shows the change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 (change in the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2) when the offset voltage is applied as negative.

  Note that the conditions in FIG. 43B are the same as those in FIG. 42B described above (the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted by adjusting the variable resistor VR2. The pachinko machine used in FIG. 43 and the pachinko machine used in FIG. 42 when the offset voltage by the variable resistor VR3 is not added to the voltage multiplied by 1.0 (the offset voltage is set to zero). Are different from each other, and the change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 is different due to the difference in the models (for example, the difference in the capacitance of the capacitor CD2).

  In FIG. 43, the horizontal axis represents the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and the vertical axis represents the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 (DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2). As shown in FIG. 43 (b), the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted by multiplying the variable resistor VR2 by 1.0, and the variable resistor is then multiplied by 1.0. When the offset voltage by VR3 is not applied (the offset voltage is set to zero), the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 is changed when the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is changed from zero degrees to 120 degrees. The maximum value varies from about 7.8 volts to about 32.0 volts.

  Further, the range of the foul sphere is a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 from zero degrees to less than 47 degrees, and the range of the right hit ball is a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 larger than 65 degrees to 120 degrees. Yes. Therefore, the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into a game area where a prize opening or the like is provided is 47 degrees or more and 65 degrees or less. As described above with reference to FIG. 42, the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 that is the firing strength at which a ball is driven into the game area is usually a target value of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 as shown in FIG. It is set within an arbitrary range including 65 degrees.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 43 (b), the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted to 1.0 times by adjusting the variable resistor VR2, and the voltage is changed to 1.0 times that voltage. When the offset voltage by the resistor VR3 is not applied (the offset voltage is set to zero), the target value of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is 65 degrees, which is the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 described above. (47 degrees or more and 65 degrees or less) is included only slightly. Therefore, it is necessary to adjust the firing intensity of the sphere (the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142, that is, the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2) with respect to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 43A, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted by multiplying the variable resistor VR2 by 1.0, and the voltage multiplied by 1.0 When a negative offset voltage is applied to the variable resistor VR3, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is changed from zero degrees to 120 degrees. Can be varied from about 6.0 volts to about 30.0 volts. Further, the range of the foul ball is a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 from zero degrees to less than 57 degrees, and the range of the right hit ball is a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 larger than 75 degrees to 120 degrees. Yes. Therefore, the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into a game area where a winning opening or the like is disposed is 57 degrees or more and 75 degrees or less. Therefore, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted by 1.0 by adjusting the variable resistor VR2, and the negative resistor is adjusted by adjusting the variable resistor VR3 to the voltage multiplied by 1.0. When the voltage is applied, the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is adjusted so as to include the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area so as to include the target value of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 of 65 degrees. Can do.

  Next, referring to FIG. 44, by adjusting the variable resistor VR2 of the pachinko machine of the third embodiment shown in FIG. 33, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is increased by 1.0. A change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 when the variable resistor VR3 is adjusted to the voltage multiplied by the positive real number with a smaller magnification and the offset voltage is added (capacitor CD2 Will be described). In FIG. 44, the variable resistor VR2 is adjusted, and the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is multiplied by a positive real number at a magnification smaller than 1.0 times, and the positive real number is multiplied by this voltage. It is the figure which showed the change (maximum change of DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor | condenser CD2) of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 at the time of adjusting the variable resistor VR3 and adding an offset voltage. In FIG. 44, in order to clarify the change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142, the following conditions are used.

  The voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted by the variable resistor VR2 to be multiplied by a positive real number by a factor smaller than 1.0 times, and the variable resistor VR3 is set to the voltage multiplied by the positive real number. When the offset voltage is added after adjustment (FIG. 44A), the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted by adjusting the variable resistor VR2 as in FIG. 42B. The comparison is made with the case of multiplying the voltage by 1.0 and not adding the offset voltage by the variable resistor VR3 to the voltage multiplied by 1.0 (the offset voltage is zero) (FIG. 44B). Since the pachinko machine used in FIG. 44 is the same as the pachinko machine used in FIG. 42, the change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 shown in FIG. The change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 44, as in FIG. 42, the horizontal axis is the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51, and the vertical axis is the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 (DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2). Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (b), the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted by multiplying the variable resistor VR2 by 1.0, and the variable resistor is then multiplied by 1.0. When the offset voltage by VR3 is not applied (the offset voltage is set to zero), the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 is changed when the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is changed from zero degrees to 120 degrees. The maximum value varies from about 4.5 volts to about 28.5 volts. Further, the range of the foul sphere is a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 from zero degrees to less than 66 degrees, and the range of the right strike ball is a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 larger than 84 degrees to 120 degrees. Yes. Therefore, the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area where the winning opening is arranged is 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less, and the target value of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is 65 degrees is not included in the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 (66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less). In addition, the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area, which originally needs to be finely adjusted, is 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less, and the width of the range Is 18 degrees.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 44 (a), the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted by adjusting the variable resistor VR2, and the magnification is smaller than 1.0 times (the pachinko machine of the third embodiment). Is approximately a positive real number multiplied by approximately 0.36), and when the offset voltage is applied by adjusting the variable resistor VR3 to the positive real number multiplied voltage, the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is set to zero degrees. When the angle is changed from 120 degrees to 120 degrees, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 changes from about 16.0 volts to about 24.0 volts. In this case, the range of the foul sphere has a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 from zero degrees to less than 23 degrees, and the range of the right strike ball has a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 larger than 77 degrees 120. It is up to degrees. Therefore, the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into a game area where a prize opening or the like is provided is 23 degrees or more and 77 degrees or less. Accordingly, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted by the variable resistor VR2 to be multiplied by a positive real number at a magnification smaller than 1.0 times, and the variable resistor is set to the positive multiplied real number voltage. When the offset voltage is applied by adjusting VR3, the rotation of the operation handle 51 is set so that the ball is shot into the game area so as to include 65 degrees which is the target value of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The range of the dynamic operation amount can be adjusted.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 44 (a), the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted to a positive real number at a magnification smaller than 1.0 by adjusting the variable resistor VR2. When the offset voltage is applied by adjusting the variable resistor VR3 to the positive multiple of the voltage, the range of the operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area is 23 degrees or more and 77 degrees or less. The width of the range is 54 degrees. Therefore, in the case of FIG. 44 (a), compared with 18 ° which is the range width of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51, which is the firing strength with which the ball is shot into the game area in the case of FIG. 44 (b). The range width of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51, which is the firing strength at which a ball is driven into the game area, is increased by 36 degrees. Therefore, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is multiplied by 1.0 by adjusting the variable resistor VR2, and the offset voltage by the variable resistor VR3 is not added to the multiplied voltage (1.0). Compared to the case where the offset voltage is zero) (FIG. 44 (b)), the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted by adjusting the variable resistor VR2 and is smaller than 1.0 times. If the variable resistor VR3 is adjusted to the positive real number multiplied voltage and an offset voltage is applied (FIG. 44 (a)), the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area Since the range of the rotation operation amount is widened, it is possible to finely adjust the launch strength of the ball for driving the ball into the game area.

  The voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is multiplied by 1.0 by adjusting the variable resistor VR2, and the offset voltage by the variable resistor VR3 is not added to the multiplied voltage (1.0) ( When it is desired to narrow the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into the game area when the offset voltage is set to zero), the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is The variable resistor VR2 is adjusted to be multiplied by a positive real number at a magnification larger than 1.0, and the variable resistor VR3 is adjusted to the voltage multiplied by the positive real number to add an offset voltage. By this adjustment, it is possible to narrow the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into the game area.

  Next, control signal processing (S1502) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing control signal processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment. The control signal processing is processing for outputting the firing control signal α and the ball feed control signal β to the firing control device 400. By executing this control signal processing, the firing control signal α and the ball feed control signal β corresponding to the timing chart shown in FIG. 12 are sent from the input / output port 205 (see FIG. 33) to the firing control device 400. Is output.

  In the control signal processing (S1502), first, it is determined whether or not the firing permission signal SG3 output from the firing control device 400 is input (S1701). If the firing permission signal SG3 is input (S1701: Yes). Then, it is determined whether or not the firing control signal α is zero volts, that is, whether or not the firing control signal α is output (S1702).

  If the launch control signal α is not zero volts, that is, if the launch control signal α is not output (S1702: No), the launch control signal α is output when the launch control signal α falls to zero volts. It is determined whether or not 602 ms has elapsed since the time (S1703). In the processing of S1703, the output period of the firing control signal α and the ball feed control signal β is set to 602 ms. Therefore, the launch control signal α and the ball feed control signal β are output from the input / output port 205 (see FIG. 33) to the launch control device 400 in a cycle of 602 ms (see S3 in FIG. 12).

  When the firing control signal α falls to zero volts, that is, when 602 ms or more has elapsed since the firing control signal α was output (S1703: Yes), the firing control signal α and the ball feed control signal β are lowered. Since the cycle, that is, the cycle in which the firing control signal α and the ball feed control signal β are output, the launch control signal α is set to zero volts (S1704), and the ball feed control signal β is set to zero volts (S1705). Through the processing of S1704 and S1705, the firing control signal α and the ball feed control signal β are output to the firing control device 400. After the process of S1705, the process proceeds to S1708.

  On the other hand, when the firing control signal α falls to zero volts, that is, when 602 ms or more has not elapsed since the launch control signal α was output (S1703: No), the launch control signal α and the ball feed control signal β are set. Since it is not a period for falling, that is, a period for outputting the firing control signal α and the ball feed control signal β, the next processing is S1708 while maintaining the current output state of the launch control signal α and the ball feed control signal β. Move on to processing.

  When the firing permission signal SG3 is not input in the processing of S1701 (S1701: No) and when the firing control signal α is zero volts, that is, the firing control signal α is output in the processing of S1702 (S1702: Yes). When the firing control signal α falls to zero volts, that is, it is determined whether or not 12 ms has elapsed since the firing control signal α was output (S1706). In the processing of S1706, the output time of the firing control signal α is set to 12 ms. Therefore, the firing control signal α is output from the input / output port 205 (see FIG. 33) to the firing control device 400 with an output time of 12 ms (see S1 in FIG. 12).

  Even when the firing permission signal SG3 is not input (S1701: No), whether or not 12 ms or more has elapsed since the firing control signal α falls to zero volts, that is, when the firing control signal α is output. Is determined (S1706), when the firing control signal α falls to zero volts and when 12 ms or more have not elapsed, even if the firing permission signal SG3 is not input, the output time of the firing control signal α This is to keep the firing control signal α at zero volts, that is, to continue outputting the firing control signal α for 12 ms. As a result of the processing of S1701 and S1706, even if the player has released his / her hand from the operation handle 51 when the firing control signal α has fallen to zero volts and 12 ms has not elapsed (the firing permission signal SG3 is no longer input). The firing control signal α is normally output (maintained at zero volts) for the output time of 12 ms.

  When the firing control signal α falls to zero volts, that is, when 12 ms or more has elapsed since the firing control signal α was output (S1706: Yes), 12 ms which is the output time of the firing control signal α has elapsed. Therefore, the firing control signal α is set to 5 volts (S1707). By the processing in S1707, the output of the firing control signal α is stopped. After the process of S1707, the process proceeds to S1708.

  On the other hand, when the firing control signal α falls to zero volts, that is, when 12 ms or more has not elapsed since the launch control signal α was output (S1706: No), it is within the output time of the launch control signal α. Then, the process proceeds to S1708, which is the next process, while maintaining the output state of the firing control signal α.

  In the processing of S1708, it is determined whether or not the ball feed control signal β is zero volts, that is, whether or not the ball feed control signal β is output (S1708). If the ball feed control signal β is not zero volts, that is, if the ball feed control signal β is output (S1708: Yes), the ball feed control signal β is output when the ball feed control signal β falls to zero volts, ie, the ball feed control signal β is output. It is determined whether or not 74 ms or more has elapsed since the time (S1709). In the processing of S1709, the output time of the ball feed control signal β is set to 74 ms. Therefore, the ball feed control signal β is output from the input / output port 205 (see FIG. 33) to the firing control device 400 with an output time of 74 ms (see S2 in FIG. 12).

  Even when the firing permission signal SG3 is not input (S1701: No), the processing from S1706 to S1708 is executed, and when the ball feed control signal β falls to zero volts, that is, the ball feed control signal β is Since it is determined whether or not 74 ms or more has elapsed from the time of output (S1709), when 74 ms or more has not elapsed since the ball feed control signal β has fallen to zero volts, the input of the firing permission signal SG3 is performed. Even when the ball feed control signal β is lost, the ball feed control signal β can be kept at zero volts for 74 ms, which is the output time of the ball feed control signal β, that is, the output of the ball feed control signal β can be continued. Therefore, even if the player releases the operation handle 51 when the ball feed control signal β has fallen to zero volts or less than 74 ms has elapsed (even if the firing permission signal SG3 is no longer input), the ball The feed control signal β is normally output (maintained at zero volts) for 74 ms, which is the output time.

  When the ball feed control signal β falls to zero volts, that is, when 74 ms or more has elapsed since the ball feed control signal β was output (S1709: Yes), the output time of the ball feed control signal β is 74 ms. Therefore, the ball feed control signal β is set to 5 volts (S1710). By the process of S1710, the output of the firing control signal α is stopped. After the processing of S1710, this control signal processing (S1502) is terminated.

  When the ball feed control signal β is not zero volts in the processing of S1708, that is, when the ball feed control signal β is not output (S1708: No) and when the ball feed control signal β falls to zero volts, that is, the ball feed. If 74 ms or more has not elapsed since the control signal β was output (S1709: No), the control signal processing (S1502) is terminated while maintaining the current output state of the ball feed control signal β.

  By this control signal processing (S1502), the firing control signal α and the ball feed control signal β are output from the input / output port 205 (see FIG. 33) to the firing control device 400. In response to the launch control signal α, the launch solenoid 142 launches a ball toward the game area. Further, the ball feed solenoid 154 arranges a ball on the front surface of the cap 142b (see FIGS. 5B and 6B) covering the tip of the plunger 142a of the firing solenoid 142 by the output ball feed control signal β. To do.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is changed by changing the resistance value of the variable resistor VR1 based on the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. Change. The MPU 201 uses the magnification determination table (stored in the magnification determination table memory 202a) based on the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 to multiply the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. The magnification to be multiplied by the determined positive real number is stored in the magnification memory 203a. Then, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is multiplied by the positive real number by the MPU 201 by the multiplication factor of the positive real number stored in the magnification memory 203a. Further, the MPU 201 stores, in the offset voltage determination table memory 202b, an offset voltage applied to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number based on the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3. The determined offset voltage is determined using the offset voltage determination table (see FIG. 40), and the determined offset voltage is stored in the offset voltage memory 203b. Then, the MPU 201 determines the firing application voltage Eα by adding the offset voltage stored in the offset voltage memory 203b to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. The MPU 201 outputs the determined firing application voltage Eα from the input / output port 205 to the firing control device 400. The output firing application voltage Eα is input to the voltage supply unit 304 of the launch control device 400, and the voltage supply unit 304 controls the launch intensity of the sphere launched from the launch solenoid 142.

  Here, as shown in the above Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2000-202094, in the conventional ball launcher, when adjusting the launch intensity of the ball launched by the solenoid, the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob are rotated. The firing intensity is adjusted by mechanically moving the solenoid up and down and back and forth. Therefore, when the player or the like has an impact on the gaming machine or when the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob are loosened due to changes over time, the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob are misaligned. Will occur. Therefore, there has been a problem in that a prescribed firing strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle does not occur due to the displacement of the position at which the solenoid pier collides with the ball.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 42, according to the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted to a positive real number by adjusting the variable resistor VR2. The firing applied voltage Eα obtained by adjusting the variable resistor VR3 and adding a positive offset voltage to the positive multiple of the voltage can be output to the firing control device 400. Therefore, by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by the variable resistor VR2 to a positive real number, the magnification is 1.0, and by setting the offset voltage to be a positive voltage by the variable resistor VR3. , The range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 that is the launch strength for hitting the ball into the game area (the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 that is the launch strength for hitting the ball into the game area is 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less In this case, it is possible to change the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 which is the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area without changing the range width (18 degrees). For example, when the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51, which is the firing strength at which a ball is shot into the game area, is in the range of 66 degrees to 84 degrees, the center value of 75 degrees is manipulated by the variable resistor VR2. By multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the handle 51 by a positive real number to 1.0, and adjusting the positive offset voltage by the variable resistor VR3, the center value is set to 66 degrees, The amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51, which is the firing strength at which a sphere is driven into the area, can be in the range of 57 degrees to 75 degrees.

  Therefore, even when the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 that is the firing strength at which the ball is shot into the game area is shifted to a larger value than the target value, the target value of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 For example, the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 can be adjusted so as to include the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area so as to include 65 degrees.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 43, according to the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted to a positive real number by adjusting the variable resistor VR2, The firing applied voltage Eα obtained by adjusting the variable resistor VR3 to a positive real number multiplied voltage and adding a negative offset voltage can be output to the firing control device 400. Therefore, by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by the variable resistor VR2 to a positive real number is set to 1.0, and the offset voltage is set to a negative voltage by the variable resistor VR3. , The range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 that is the firing strength at which the ball is shot into the game area (the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 that is the shot strength at which the ball is shot into the game area is 47 degrees to 65 degrees In this case, it is possible to change the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 which is the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area without changing the range width (18 degrees). For example, when the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51, which is the firing strength at which a ball is shot into the game area, is in the range of 47 degrees or more and 65 degrees or less, the center value of 56 degrees is manipulated by the variable resistor VR2. By multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the handle 51 by a positive real number to 1.0, and adjusting the negative offset voltage by the variable resistor VR3, the center value is set to 66 degrees, The amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51, which is the firing strength at which a sphere is driven into the area, can be in the range of 57 degrees to 75 degrees.

  Therefore, even when the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 that is the launch strength at which the ball is shot into the game area is shifted to a smaller value than the target value, the target value of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 For example, the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 can be adjusted so as to include the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area so as to include 65 degrees.

  Further, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is multiplied by a real number with a magnification smaller than 1.0 by adjusting the variable resistor VR2, so that the operation handle 51 The amount of change in voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number in accordance with the amount of rotation operation (the minimum voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number) The difference between the value and the maximum value) is made smaller than the amount of change in the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 (the difference between the minimum value and the maximum value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1). it can. That is, the slope of a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number (the minimum value and the maximum value of the voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number are connected). A straight line (inclination in FIG. 41 (b)) represents the inclination of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 according to the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 (the minimum value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1). Compared with the straight line connecting the maximum values (inclination in FIG. 41A), it can be made smaller.

  Here, since the firing applied voltage Eα is adjusted by a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number, the amount of change in the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 is adjusted. (Inclination) also decreases. Since the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 for driving a ball into the game area is within a certain range (for example, about 17.5 volts or more and about 21.0 volts or less (see FIG. 44)), the voltage E1 is applied to the firing solenoid 142. By reducing the amount of change (inclination) of the voltage E1, the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area can be expanded (for example, the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area) The rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is in the range of 66 degrees to 84 degrees, the range width of 18 degrees can be set to the range of 23 degrees to 77 degrees, and the range width can be expanded to 54 degrees (FIG. 44)). Accordingly, the range of the operation amount of the operation handle 51 can be adjusted so as to include, for example, 65 degrees that is the target value of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51.

  Moreover, the range of the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 which becomes the firing strength at which a ball is driven into the game area can be changed to have a wide range width. In other words, it is possible to widen the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 that provides the firing strength with which the ball is driven into the game area. Therefore, it is possible to finely adjust the firing strength for driving a ball into the game area by the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51.

  In addition, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is multiplied by a positive real number at a magnification larger than 1.0 by adjusting the variable resistor VR2, thereby operating the operation handle 51. The amount of change in voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number in accordance with the amount of rotation operation 51 (the voltage generated by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number) The difference between the minimum value and the maximum value) is increased in comparison with the amount of change in the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 (difference between the minimum value and the maximum value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1). be able to.

  Here, since the firing applied voltage Eα is adjusted by a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number, the amount of change in the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 is adjusted. (Slope) also increases. Therefore, when it is desired to narrow the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted by adjusting the variable resistor VR2. By multiplying by a positive real number at a magnification larger than 1.0 times, the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into the game area can be narrowed.

  Here, as shown in the above Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2000-202094, in the conventional ball launcher, the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob are rotated to mechanically move the solenoid up and down and back and forth. Since the launch intensity is adjusted, the accuracy of the launch intensity adjustment depends on the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob, and the adjustment accuracy of the prescribed launch intensity according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle is There was a problem that it was low.

  However, according to the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, the firing intensity of the sphere fired by the launching solenoid 142 is determined based on the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 and the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3. And is adjusted by. In general, the direct current voltage is easy to finely and accurately adjust, and has a property that is resistant to change with time (not easily distorted), so the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 that provides the firing strength with which a ball is driven into the game area. Alternatively, the range width can be finely and accurately adjusted, and the adjustment can be made resistant to change with time (not easily distorted).

  In addition, the pachinko machine of the third embodiment is provided with a variable resistor VR2 that adjusts a magnification that multiplies the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number, so that it is generated in the variable resistor VR1. It is possible to change (finely adjust) the magnification for multiplying the current voltage by a positive real number. Here, the firing applied voltage Eα output from the input / output port 205 to the firing control device 400 may change from the initially set value due to the temporal change of the input / output port 205 or the like. In this case, since the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 also changes, the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area changes from the initially set range. Resulting in. In addition, the range width of the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into the game area may be smaller than the initially set range width.

  In these cases, the voltage applied in the firing control device 400 is supplied from the input / output port 205 by changing (finely adjusting) the firing applied voltage Eα output from the input / output port 205 to the firing control device 400 by the variable resistor VR2. The firing applied voltage Eα output to the unit 304 can be changed (finely adjusted). Thereby, the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 can be changed (finely adjusted), and the firing intensity of the sphere launched from the firing solenoid 142 can be changed (finely adjusted). Therefore, the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 or the range width of the operation handle 51, which is the firing strength at which the ball is shot into the game area, can be changed (finely adjusted) to the initially set range or the initially set range width. it can.

  Further, the variable resistor VR2 is used to change the magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. In general, a variable resistor has a simple configuration and is inexpensive as compared with a power supply circuit configured by a complicated circuit. Therefore, it is possible to finely adjust the range of the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 or the range width of the operation handle 51 as the launching strength at which the ball is driven into the game area by using the variable resistor VR2 having a simple configuration and low cost.

  Further, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is multiplied by a positive real number by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Therefore, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by the MPU 201 can be easily multiplied by a positive real number without using a complicated circuit or the like.

  Further, the MPU 201 generates the variable resistor VR1 in the start-up process S1402 based on the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 read in the start-up process S1401 shown in FIG. The magnification for multiplying the current voltage by a positive real number is determined. Therefore, the MPU 201 can accurately determine the magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number.

  Further, the MPU 201 adds an offset voltage to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. Therefore, an offset voltage can be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number without using a complicated circuit or the like.

  In addition, the MPU 201 generates the variable resistor VR1 in the start-up process S1404 based on the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 read in the start-up process S1403 shown in FIG. The offset voltage to be added to the voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage being positive by a real number is determined. Therefore, the MPU 201 can accurately determine an offset voltage to be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number.

  The pachinko machine according to the third embodiment is provided with a variable resistor VR3 that adjusts an offset voltage applied to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. Can be changed (fine-tuned). Here, the offset voltage is only added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. Therefore, it is possible to change (finely adjust) only the voltage value without changing the voltage change amount obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number to obtain the firing applied voltage Eα. The firing intensity of the sphere fired by the firing solenoid 142 is determined based on this firing applied voltage Eα. Therefore, by changing (fine-tuning) the offset voltage applied to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number, the operation handle 51 can be turned so as to have a launch intensity at which the ball is driven into the game area. Only the range of the rotation operation amount can be finely adjusted without changing the range of the operation amount (for example, the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 that is the firing strength at which a ball is driven into the game area is 66 degrees or more. The range of 84 degrees or less can be changed to a range of 57 degrees or more and 75 degrees or less (see FIG. 42)).

  Therefore, when the launch intensity of the ball launched by the launch solenoid 142 deteriorates due to, for example, a change over time, the ball cannot be driven into the game area unless the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is set larger than the initially set range. However, by changing (fine-tuning) the offset voltage applied to the voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number by the variable resistor VR3, the operation becomes the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area. The range of the amount of rotation of the handle 51 can be finely adjusted to the initially set range.

  Further, by changing the resistance value of the variable resistor VR3, it is possible to change (finely adjust) the offset voltage applied to the voltage generated by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. Thereby, the firing applied voltage Eα output from the input / output port 205 to the voltage supply unit 304 can be changed (finely adjusted). Therefore, it is possible to change (finely adjust) the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 and change (finely adjust) the firing intensity of the sphere launched from the firing solenoid 142. Here, in general, the variable resistor has a simple configuration and is inexpensive as compared with a power supply circuit or the like configured by a complicated circuit. Therefore, it is possible to finely adjust the range of the operation amount of the operation handle 51 or the range width of the operation handle 51, which is the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area, using the variable resistor VR3 having a simple configuration and being inexpensive.

  Next, a pachinko machine according to a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 48. The pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment is obtained by changing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine of the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, the range or range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into the game area is set to a voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301, an addition voltage adjustment unit 302, and an addition circuit unit 303 using an electronic circuit. Further, when the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 becomes larger than a specified value (105 degrees in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment), the right hit ball is surely fired and the right hit ball The firing intensity of the power is made constant by the handle monitoring unit 307, the voltage raising unit 308, and the limiter unit 309 using an electronic circuit. In the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment, a start-up process (see FIG. 35) and launch that are executed by the main controller 110 within the range or range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into the game area. Adjusted by the control process (see FIG. 46), and when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 becomes larger than a specified value, the right-handed ball is reliably fired and the firing strength of the right-handed ball is constant. Is performed by a firing control process (see FIG. 46) executed by the main controller 110.

  According to the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, it is possible to widely adjust the range or range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into the game area (see FIG. 48A). On the other hand, depending on the case, the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into the game area or the range width thereof can be adjusted narrowly. Furthermore, when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is larger than a specified value (105 degrees in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment), the right-handed ball can be reliably launched and the right-handed ball The firing intensity can be made constant.

  FIG. 45 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment. The pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment is provided with a monitoring memory 202c and a limit value memory 202d in the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine of the third embodiment. Therefore, the same number is attached | subjected to the same part as the pachinko machine of 3rd Embodiment mentioned above in FIG. 33, the description is abbreviate | omitted, and only a different part from the pachinko machine of 3rd Embodiment is demonstrated.

  The monitoring memory 202c indicates that the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than a specified value (105 degrees in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment), that is, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51. Is a memory for storing a prescribed value as a voltage in order for the MPU 201 to detect that is larger than the prescribed value. The MPU 201 compares the specified value stored in the monitoring memory 202c with the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 in the process of S1807 of the launch control process shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the voltage generated in the device VR1 is equal to or less than a specified value stored in the monitoring memory 202c. By this determination, the MPU 201 can determine that the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 has become larger than the specified value.

  The limit value memory 202d is a memory that stores a limit value as a voltage value that limits the voltage value so that the firing applied voltage Eα output from the input / output port 205 to the firing control device 400 does not exceed a predetermined value. If the MPU 201 determines in step S1807 of the launch control process shown in FIG. 46, which will be described later, that the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 has become larger than the specified value (105 degrees in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment). 46, the firing application voltage Eα is limited to the limit value stored in the limit value memory 202d in the process of S1811 of the launch control process shown in FIG. When the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 becomes larger than the specified value due to the limitation of the voltage value, the right-handed ball can be reliably fired and the firing strength of the right-handed ball should be constant. Can do.

  The magnification memory 203a and the offset voltage memory 203b have the same configuration as the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, but the timings for storing each value in the magnification memory 203a and the offset voltage memory 203b are different, so only the timing will be described. To do.

  The magnification memory 203a will be described. When a DC voltage is generated in the variable resistor VR2 of the operation knob 122a and the generated DC voltage is read into the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the process of S1802 of the launch control process shown in FIG. The MPU 201 stores the magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number in the magnification determination table memory 202a in the process of S1803 of the firing control process shown in FIG. Determined by the magnification determination table. By the process of S1803 of the firing control process, the determined magnification to be multiplied by a positive real number is stored in the magnification memory 203a.

  The offset voltage memory 203b will be described. When a DC voltage is generated in the variable resistor VR3 of the operation knob 122b, the generated DC voltage is read into the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the process of S1804 of the launch control process shown in FIG. 46 described later. In response to the received DC voltage, the MPU 201 uses the offset voltage determination table to add an offset voltage to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number in the process of S1805 of the firing control process shown in FIG. This is determined by the offset voltage determination table stored in the memory 202b. The offset voltage determined by the process of S1805 of the firing control process is stored in the offset voltage memory 203b.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the firing control process (S1501) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 46 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the launch control process of the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment. The pachinko machine launch control process of the fourth embodiment is a process for determining a magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number, and a voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number multiple. A process for determining an offset voltage to be applied to the measured voltage and a process for outputting the firing applied voltage Eα to the firing control device 400. Note that the launch control process (S1501) of the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment is a process executed in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  In the launch control process (S1501) of the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the launch permission signal SG3 output from the launch control device 400 is input (S1801), and the launch permission signal SG3 is input. If not (S1601: No), this launch control process (S1501) is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the firing permission signal SG3 is input (S1601: Yes), the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 of the operation knob 122a is read (S1802), and is generated in the read variable resistor VR2. Using the DC voltage, a magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number is determined from the magnification determination table stored in the magnification determination table memory 202a and stored in the magnification memory 203a. (S1803).

  As described above, in the launch control process (S1501) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36) of the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment, the MPU 201 reads the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 ( S1802) Since the magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number is determined (S1803), the magnification for multiplying the positive real number is determined every time the timer interrupt process is executed (every 2 ms). can do. Therefore, while turning the operation handle 51 and confirming the launch intensity of the sphere launched by the launch solenoid 142, the launch resistance of the sphere can be adjusted by adjusting the variable resistor VR2.

  After executing the processing of S1803, the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 of the operation knob 122b is read (S1804), and the offset voltage determination table memory 202b is used using the DC voltage generated in the read variable resistor VR3. The offset voltage to be added to the voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number is determined from the offset voltage determination table stored in the operation handle 51 and stored in the offset voltage memory 203b (S1805).

  Thus, in the launch control process (S1501) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36) of the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, the MPU 201 reads the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 ( S1804) Since an offset voltage to be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number is determined (S1805), the offset voltage is determined every time the timer interrupt process is executed (every 2 ms). can do. Therefore, while rotating the operation handle 51 and confirming the launch intensity of the sphere launched by the launch solenoid 142, the launch resistance of the sphere can be adjusted by adjusting the variable resistor VR3.

  After executing the processing of S1805, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is read (S1806), and whether or not the voltage generated in the read variable resistor VR1 is equal to or less than the specified value of the monitoring memory 202c. That is, it is determined whether or not the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is equal to or less than a specified value (105 degrees in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment) (S1807).

  The voltage generated in the read variable resistor VR1 is equal to or less than the specified value in the monitoring memory 202c, that is, the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is equal to or less than the specified value (105 degrees in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment). If there is (S1807: No), the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 read in the processing of S1806 is multiplied by a positive real number based on the magnification to be multiplied by the positive real number stored in the magnification memory 203a (S1808). .

  After executing the processing of S1808, based on the offset voltage stored in the offset voltage memory 203b, the offset voltage is added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number (S1809). The applied voltage is output to the firing control device 400 as the firing applied voltage Eα (S1810), and this firing control process (S1501) is terminated. As described above, when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is equal to or less than a specified value (105 degrees in the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment), the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is reduced. The positive real number is multiplied, an offset voltage is added to the positive real number multiplied voltage to obtain the firing applied voltage Eα, and the firing applied voltage Eα is output to the firing control device 400.

  On the other hand, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 read in the processing of S1807 is larger than the specified value of the monitoring memory 202c, that is, the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is the specified value (in the fourth embodiment). If it is greater than 105 degrees in the pachinko machine (S1807: Yes), the voltage of the firing applied voltage Eα is set to the limit value in the limit value memory 202d and output to the firing control device 400 (S1811). By the process of S1811, the voltage value of the firing applied voltage Eα output to the firing control device 400 is limited to the limit value of the limit value memory 202d, and thus the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 becomes larger than the specified value. In this case, the right-handed ball can be reliably fired and the firing strength of the right-handed ball can be made constant.

  By the launch control process (S1501) of the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment, when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is equal to or less than a specified value (105 degrees in the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment), the operation handle An operation for driving a ball into the game area by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of 51 by a positive real number and adding the offset voltage to the positive real number voltage to obtain the firing applied voltage Eα. The range or range width of the turning operation amount of the handle 51 can be adjusted widely, and the range or range width of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into the game area can be adjusted narrowly. it can.

  Further, when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 becomes larger than a specified value (105 degrees in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment), the voltage value of the firing applied voltage Eα output to the firing control device 400 is Since the limit value is limited to the limit value stored in the limit value memory 202d, the right-handed ball can be reliably fired and the firing strength of the right-handed ball can be made constant.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the change of the voltage by the launch control process (S1501) of the pachinko machine of 4th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing changes in voltages when the firing control process (S1501) shown in FIG. 46 is executed. In FIG. 47, the multiplication factor of the positive real number stored in the magnification memory 203a is about 0.29. The offset voltage stored in the offset voltage memory 203b is about 2.47 volts. The specified value of the monitoring memory 202c is about 3.85 volts (a DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 when the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is 105 degrees), and the limit value memory 202d The limit value is about 3.85 volts.

  In FIG. 47, the horizontal axis represents the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and the vertical axis represents voltage. As shown in FIG. 47, the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is set from the minimum value of zero degrees to the maximum value of 120 degrees, and as shown in (a) by the rotation operation of the operation handle 51, as shown in FIG. The DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 (see FIG. 45) of the operation handle 51 changes from about 0.7 volts to about 4.30 volts, and the amount of change is about 3.60 volts.

  The voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is not more than a specified value in the monitoring memory 202c, that is, the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is a specified value (105 in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment). ), The DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is read into the MPU 201 in S1806 of the launch control process (S1501) shown in FIG. 46, and S1808 of the launch control process. In this process, the MPU 201 corrects the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 based on the magnification (about 0.29 in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment) that is stored in the magnification memory 203a and is multiplied by a positive real number. Multiply the real number.

  Then, as shown in (b), the voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number changes from about 0.20 volts to about 1.15 volts, and the amount of change is about 0.95 volts. Therefore, by reducing the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number with a magnification smaller than 1.0, the amount of change in voltage is reduced compared to the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1. Can do.

  In the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment, the positive real number magnification stored in the magnification memory 203a is about 0.29, but the positive real number magnification stored in the magnification memory 203a is, for example, 1 When the magnification is greater than about 1.0, the voltage generated by the variable resistor VR1 is a positive real number multiplied by about 0.77 volts to about 4.73 volts. The amount will be about 3.96 volts. Therefore, the amount of change in voltage is increased by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number by a factor larger than 1.0, compared with the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1. Can do.

  The voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 based on the offset voltage (about 2.47 volts in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment) stored in the offset voltage memory 203b in the process of S1809 of the launch control process When an offset voltage is added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the positive real number by a positive real number, the voltage becomes the firing applied voltage Eα. As shown in (c), the firing applied voltage Eα is such that the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is equal to or less than a specified value of the monitoring memory 202c. When the value is less than the specified value (105 degrees in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment), the change is from about 2.67 volts to about 3.47 volts (when the operation handle 51 is turned 105 degrees). The amount of change is about 0.80 volts. Here, as shown in (b), the voltage change amount obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number is about 0.20 volts to about 1.00 volts (of the operation handle 51). The amount of change is about 0.80 volts.

  Therefore, when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is equal to or less than the specified value, a voltage obtained by adding an offset voltage to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 shown in (c) by a positive real number ( The amount of change in the firing applied voltage Eα) is the same as the amount of change in the voltage generated by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 shown in (b) by a positive real number. Accordingly, when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is equal to or less than the specified value, the offset voltage does not change the amount of change in the voltage generated by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. The voltage value of the voltage generated by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number can be increased.

  In the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment, the offset voltage stored in the offset voltage memory 203b is about 2.47 volts, but the offset voltage stored in the offset voltage memory 203b is set to, for example, -0.20 volts. Then, a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number changes from about zero volts to about 0.95 volts. Therefore, if the offset voltage is negative, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is a positive real number without changing the amount of change in the voltage generated by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. The voltage value of the doubled voltage can be reduced.

  The voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is larger than the specified value in the monitoring memory 202c, that is, the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is a specified value (105 degrees in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment). If larger, the voltage of the firing application voltage Eα is set to about 3.85 volts, which is the limit value of the limit value memory 202d, in the process of S1811 of the launch control process (S1501) shown in FIG.

  Therefore, when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than a specified value (105 degrees in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment), as shown in (c), the firing applied voltage Eα is about 3.85 volts. It can be limited to a constant voltage.

  Next, referring to FIG. 48, the variable resistor VR2 of the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 45 is adjusted, and the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is increased by 1.0 times. A launch solenoid in the case of multiplying the positive real number by a small magnification, adjusting the variable resistor VR3 to the voltage multiplied by the positive real number, adding an offset voltage, and further monitoring the DC voltage of the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 A change in the maximum value of voltage E1 applied to 142 (change in DC voltage Ec applied to capacitor CD2) will be described. In FIG. 48, the variable resistor VR2 is adjusted and the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is multiplied by a positive real number at a magnification smaller than 1.0 times, and variable to the positive real number multiplied voltage. The offset voltage is applied by adjusting the resistor VR3, and the change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 when the DC voltage of the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is monitored (applied to the capacitor CD2). FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a change in DC voltage Ec. In FIG. 48, in order to clarify the change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142, the following conditions are used.

  By adjusting the variable resistor VR2, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is multiplied by a positive real number at a magnification smaller than 1.0 times, and the variable resistor VR3 is set to the positive real number multiplied voltage. When the offset voltage is adjusted and the DC voltage of the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is monitored (FIG. 48A), the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is variable. The resistor VR2 is adjusted to be multiplied by 1.0, the offset voltage by the variable resistor VR3 is not added to the voltage multiplied by 1.0 (the offset voltage is set to zero), and the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is further increased. The comparison is made with the case where the DC voltage is not monitored (FIG. 48B).

  Note that the change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 shown in FIG. 48B is the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 shown in FIG. 42B (the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51). Is the same as the change in the maximum value of the firing applied voltage Eα input to the firing control device 400 as it is. Therefore, this comparison reveals a change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 of the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment (change in the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2).

  In FIG. 48, similarly to FIGS. 42, 43 and 44, the horizontal axis represents the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and the vertical axis represents the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 (applied to the capacitor CD2). DC voltage Ec).

  As shown in FIG. 48 (b), the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is multiplied by 1.0 by adjusting the variable resistor VR2, and the variable resistor is set to the multiplied voltage by 1.0. When the offset voltage by VR3 is not applied (the offset voltage is set to zero) and the voltage of the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is not monitored, the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is changed from zero degree to 120 degrees. When varied, the maximum value of voltage E1 applied to firing solenoid 142 varies from about 4.5 volts to about 28.5 volts. Further, the range of the foul sphere is a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 from zero degrees to less than 66 degrees, and the range of the right strike ball is a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 larger than 84 degrees to 120 degrees. Yes. Therefore, the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area where the winning opening is arranged is 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less, and the target value of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is 65 degrees is not included in the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 (66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less). In addition, the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area, which originally needs to be finely adjusted, is 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less, and the width of the range Is 18 degrees.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 48 (a), the variable resistor VR2 is adjusted so that the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is less than 1.0 times (the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment). Then, the positive real number is multiplied by about 0.29), the variable resistor VR3 is adjusted to the voltage multiplied by the positive real number, the offset voltage is added, and the DC voltage of the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is monitored. In this case, when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is changed from zero degree to 120 degrees, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 is about 17.1 volts to about 25.0 volts. Has changed. In this case, the range of the foul sphere is a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 from zero degrees to less than 19 degrees, and the range of the right strike ball is a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 larger than 105 degrees to 120 degrees. ing. Therefore, the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into a game area where a prize opening or the like is disposed is 19 degrees or more and 105 degrees or less.

  Therefore, by adjusting the variable resistor VR2, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is multiplied by a positive real number at a magnification smaller than 1.0 times, and the variable resistor is set to the positive real number multiplied voltage. When the offset voltage is applied by adjusting VR3 and the DC voltage of the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is monitored, the target value of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is set to 65 degrees. It is possible to adjust the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 that is the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 48 (a), the variable resistor VR2 is adjusted to multiply the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number at a magnification smaller than 1.0 times, When the variable resistor VR3 is adjusted and the offset voltage is added to the positive multiplied voltage, and the DC voltage of the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is monitored, an operation for driving a ball into the game area is performed. The range of the rotation operation amount of the handle 51 is 19 degrees or more and 105 degrees or less, and the width of the range is 86 degrees.

  Therefore, in the case of FIG. 48 (a), compared with 18 ° which is the range width of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 which is the firing strength at which the ball is shot into the game area in the case of FIG. 48 (b). In this case, the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, which is the strength of launching a ball into the game area, has increased by 68 degrees. Therefore, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is multiplied by 1.0 by adjusting the variable resistor VR2, and the offset voltage by the variable resistor VR3 is not added to the multiplied voltage (1.0) ( Furthermore, compared with the case where the voltage of the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is not monitored (FIG. 48B), the variable resistor VR2 is adjusted to adjust the variable resistance of the operation handle 51. The voltage generated in the resistor VR1 is multiplied by a positive real number with a magnification smaller than 1.0, and the offset voltage is added to the voltage obtained by multiplying the positive real number by adjusting the variable resistor VR3. When the DC voltage of the variable resistor VR1 is monitored (FIG. 48 (a)), the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area is widened, so that the ball is driven into the game area. It is possible to finely adjust the radiation strength of the sphere.

  Further, the variable resistor VR2 is adjusted to multiply the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number with a magnification smaller than 1.0 times, and the variable resistor is set to the positive real number multiplied voltage. When the offset voltage is applied by adjusting VR3 and the DC voltage of the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is monitored (FIG. 48A), the range of the right-handed ball is the rotation of the operation handle 51. The manipulated variable is greater than 105 degrees and up to 120 degrees. At this time, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 is about 25 which is a voltage value that can reliably fire the right-handed ball. The voltage is raised to 0.0 volts and the voltage value is limited to about 25.0 volts. Therefore, when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is greater than 105 degrees, the right hit ball can be reliably fired.

  When the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is greater than 105 degrees, even if the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is increased more than necessary, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 is about Limited to 25.0 volts. Therefore, since the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 can be prevented from becoming an overvoltage, it is possible to prevent damage to the return rubber 69 and the like hit by the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142.

  Further, when the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 is about 25.0 volts, which is less than the absolute maximum rated voltage value of the firing solenoid. Is set. Therefore, even if the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is increased more than necessary, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 does not exceed the absolute maximum rating, so that the firing solenoid 142 is prevented from being damaged. be able to.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, the direct current voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is changed by changing the resistance value of the variable resistor VR1 based on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Change. The MPU 201 uses the magnification determination table stored in the magnification determination table memory 202a (FIG. 39) based on the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 to multiply the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. The magnification to be multiplied by the determined positive real number is stored in the magnification memory 203a. Then, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is multiplied by the positive real number by the MPU 201 by the multiplication factor of the positive real number stored in the magnification memory 203a. Further, the MPU 201 stores, in the offset voltage determination table memory 202b, an offset voltage applied to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number based on the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3. The determined offset voltage is determined using the offset voltage determination table (see FIG. 40), and the determined offset voltage is stored in the offset voltage memory 203b. Then, the MPU 201 determines the firing application voltage Eα by adding the offset voltage stored in the offset voltage memory 203b to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. The MPU 201 outputs the determined firing application voltage Eα to the firing control device 400. The output firing application voltage Eα is input to the voltage supply unit 304 of the launch control device 400, and the voltage supply unit 304 controls the launch intensity of the sphere launched from the launch solenoid 142.

  According to the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is multiplied by a positive real number by adjusting the variable resistor VR2, and the variable resistor is set to a voltage obtained by multiplying the positive real number by a voltage. The firing applied voltage Eα obtained by adding the positive offset voltage by adjusting the VR3 can be output to the firing control device 400. Therefore, by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by the variable resistor VR2 to a positive real number, the magnification is 1.0, and by setting the offset voltage to be a positive voltage by the variable resistor VR3. The range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 which becomes the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area without changing the range width of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 at which the ball is driven into the game area. Can be changed.

  Therefore, even when the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 that is the firing strength at which the ball is shot into the game area is shifted to a larger value than the target value, the target value of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 For example, the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 can be adjusted so as to include the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area so as to include 65 degrees.

  Also, according to the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted to a positive real number by adjusting the variable resistor VR2, and the positive real number is multiplied by this voltage. It is possible to adjust the variable resistor VR3 and output the firing applied voltage Eα obtained by adding a negative offset voltage to the firing control device. Therefore, by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by the variable resistor VR2 to a positive real number is set to 1.0, and the offset voltage is set to a negative voltage by the variable resistor VR3. The range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 which becomes the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area without changing the range width of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 at which the ball is driven into the game area. Can be changed.

  Therefore, even when the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 that is the launch strength at which the ball is shot into the game area is shifted to a smaller value than the target value, the target value of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 For example, the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 can be adjusted so as to include the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area so as to include 65 degrees.

  Further, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is adjusted by adjusting the variable resistor VR2 and multiplied by a positive real number at a magnification smaller than 1.0, whereby the operation handle The amount of change in voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number in accordance with the amount of rotation operation 51 (the voltage generated by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number) The difference between the minimum value and the maximum value of the variable resistor VR1 is made smaller than the change amount of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 (the difference between the minimum value and the maximum value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1). be able to. That is, the slope of a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number (the minimum value and the maximum value of the voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number are connected). A straight line (inclination in FIG. 47 (b)) represents the inclination of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 (the minimum value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1) according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. Compared with a straight line connecting to the maximum value (inclination in FIG. 47A), it can be made smaller.

  Here, since the firing applied voltage Eα is adjusted by a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number, the amount of change in the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 is adjusted. (Inclination) also decreases. Since the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 for driving a ball into the game area is in a certain range (for example, about 17.5 volts or more and about 21.0 volts or less (see FIG. 48)), the voltage E1 is applied to the firing solenoid 142. By reducing the amount of change (inclination) of the voltage E1, the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area can be expanded (for example, the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area) The amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is in the range of 66 degrees to 84 degrees, and the range width of 18 degrees is in the range of 19 degrees to 105 degrees, and the range width can be expanded to 86 degrees (FIG. 48))). Accordingly, the range of the operation amount of the operation handle 51 can be adjusted so as to include, for example, 65 degrees that is the target value of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51.

  Moreover, the range of the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 which becomes the firing strength at which a ball is driven into the game area can be changed to have a wide range width. In other words, it is possible to widen the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 that provides the firing strength with which the ball is driven into the game area. Therefore, it is possible to finely adjust the firing strength for driving a ball into the game area by the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51.

  In addition, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is multiplied by a positive real number at a magnification larger than 1.0 by adjusting the variable resistor VR2, thereby operating the operation handle 51. The amount of change in voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number in accordance with the amount of rotation operation 51 (the voltage generated by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number) The difference between the minimum value and the maximum value) is increased in comparison with the amount of change in the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 (difference between the minimum value and the maximum value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1). be able to.

  Here, since the firing applied voltage Eα is adjusted by a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number, the amount of change in the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 is adjusted. (Slope) also increases. Therefore, when it is desired to narrow the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into the game area, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted by adjusting the variable resistor VR2. What is necessary is just to multiply the positive real number by a magnification larger than 1.0 times and adjust the variable resistor VR3 to the voltage multiplied by the positive real number to add the offset voltage. By this adjustment, it is possible to narrow the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into the game area.

  Further, the firing intensity of the sphere fired by the firing solenoid 142 is adjusted by the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 and the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3. In general, the direct current voltage is easy to finely and accurately adjust, and has a property that is resistant to change with time (not easily distorted), so the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 that provides the firing strength with which a ball is driven into the game area. Alternatively, the range width can be finely and accurately adjusted, and the adjustment can be made resistant to change with time (not easily distorted).

  In addition, the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment is provided with a variable resistor VR2 that adjusts the magnification by which the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is multiplied by a positive real number. It is possible to change (finely adjust) the magnification for multiplying the current voltage by a positive real number. Here, the firing applied voltage Eα output from the input / output port 205 to the firing control device 400 may change from the initially set value due to the temporal change of the input / output port 205 or the like. In this case, since the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 also changes, the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area changes from the initially set range. Resulting in. In addition, the range width of the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into the game area may be smaller than the initially set range width.

  In these cases, the firing applied voltage Eα output from the input / output port 205 to the firing control device 400 is changed (finely adjusted) by the variable resistor VR2, and is output from the input / output port 205 to the voltage supply unit 304. The firing applied voltage Eα can be changed (finely adjusted). Thereby, the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 can be changed (finely adjusted), and the firing intensity of the sphere launched from the firing solenoid 142 can be changed (finely adjusted). Therefore, the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 or the range width of the operation handle 51, which is the firing strength at which the ball is shot into the game area, can be changed (finely adjusted) to the initially set range or the initially set range width. it can.

  Further, the variable resistor VR2 is used to change the magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. In general, a variable resistor has a simple configuration and is inexpensive as compared with a power supply circuit configured by a complicated circuit. Therefore, it is possible to finely adjust the range of the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 or the range width of the operation handle 51 as the launching strength at which the ball is driven into the game area by using the variable resistor VR2 having a simple configuration and low cost.

  In addition, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is multiplied by a positive real number by the MPU 201. Therefore, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 can be easily multiplied by a positive real number without using a complicated circuit or the like.

  In addition, the MPU 201 stores the magnification determination table memory 202a in the firing control process S1803 based on the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 read in the firing control process S1802 shown in FIG. The magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number is determined using the determined magnification determination table. Therefore, the MPU 201 can accurately determine the magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number.

  Further, the MPU 201 adds an offset voltage to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. Therefore, an offset voltage can be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number without using a complicated circuit or the like.

  The MPU 201 generates the variable resistor VR1 in the firing control process S1806 based on the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 read in the firing control process S1805 shown in FIG. The offset voltage to be added to the voltage obtained by multiplying the current voltage by a positive real number is determined using the offset voltage determination table stored in the offset voltage determination table memory 202b. Therefore, the MPU 201 can accurately determine an offset voltage to be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number.

  Further, the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment is provided with a variable resistor VR3 for adjusting an offset voltage applied to a voltage obtained by multiplying a voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. Can be changed (fine-tuned). This offset voltage is only added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. Therefore, it is possible to change (finely adjust) only the voltage value of the firing application voltage Eα without changing the amount of change in the voltage generated by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. Here, the firing intensity of the sphere fired by the firing solenoid 142 is determined based on this firing applied voltage Eα. Therefore, by changing (fine-tuning) the offset voltage applied to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number, the operation handle 51 can be turned so as to have a launch intensity at which the ball is driven into the game area. Only the range of the rotation operation amount can be finely adjusted without changing the range of the operation amount. Therefore, when the launch intensity of the ball launched by the launch solenoid 142 deteriorates due to, for example, a change over time, the ball cannot be driven into the game area unless the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is set larger than the initially set range. However, by changing (fine-tuning) the offset voltage applied to the voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number by the variable resistor VR3, the operation becomes the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area. The range of the amount of rotation of the handle 51 can be finely adjusted to the initially set range.

  Further, by changing the resistance value of the variable resistor VR3, it is possible to change (finely adjust) the offset voltage applied to the voltage generated by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. Thereby, the firing applied voltage Eα output from the input / output port 205 to the voltage supply unit 304 in the firing control device 400 can be changed (finely adjusted). Therefore, it is possible to change (finely adjust) the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 and change (finely adjust) the firing intensity of the sphere launched from the firing solenoid 142. Here, in general, the variable resistor has a simple configuration and is inexpensive as compared with a power supply circuit or the like configured by a complicated circuit. Therefore, it is possible to finely adjust the range of the operation amount of the operation handle 51 or the range width of the operation handle 51, which is the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area, using the variable resistor VR3 having a simple configuration and being inexpensive.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, the MPU 201 uses the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 and 3.85 volts (the operation handle) which is a specified value stored in the monitoring memory 202c. DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 when the rotation operation amount of 51 is 105 degrees. Then, when the MPU 201 detects that the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is greater than 105 degrees, the MPU 201 increases the firing application voltage Eα to about 3.85 volts. Here, since the firing applied voltage Eα is a voltage input to the voltage supply unit 304 in the firing control device 400, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 is reliably right-handed. The voltage can be raised to about 25.0 volts, which can fire the sphere. Therefore, when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, it is possible to switch the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing solenoid 142 accurately and stably.

  In addition, the MPU 201 performs detection when the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is greater than 105 degrees by detecting the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51. In general, the detection of a DC voltage is accurate and has a property that is resistant to change with time (not easily distorted). Therefore, the MPU 201 can accurately detect the case where the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, and can make the detection strong against change with time (hard to go wrong).

  Further, the MPU 201 operates accurately and stably. Therefore, when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the MPU 201 sets the firing applied voltage Eα output from the input / output port 205 and input to the voltage supply unit 304 in the firing control device 400 to about 3 Switching to .85 volts accurately and stably. Therefore, when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, it is possible to accurately and stably switch the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing solenoid 142.

  Here, as shown in the above Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2000-202094, in the conventional ball launcher, the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob are misaligned, and the position where the solenoid pier collides with the sphere. The launch strength of the ball is weakened by the deviation, and even when the operation amount of the operation handle is maximized, the ball is placed on, for example, a return rubber (see FIG. 2) disposed at the right end of the game area where the ball fired by the solenoid flows down. There was a problem that it was not possible to win and a normal game could not be performed.

  On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the MPU 201 raises the firing applied voltage Eα to about 3.85 volts. Here, the firing applied voltage Eα raised to about 3.85 volts is the firing strength at which the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 through the launch port 68a moves along the rail 62 and reaches the return rubber 69. Is set to be. That is, when the firing applied voltage Eα input to the voltage supply unit 304 in the firing control device 400 reaches about 3.85 volts, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 is reliably right-handed. It is set to be about 25.0 volts, which is a voltage value at which a sphere can be launched. Therefore, when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the ball launched from the firing solenoid 142 to the game area can be reliably hit along the rail 62 and hit the rubber 69. Can be played reliably.

  Further, when the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, even if the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is increased more than necessary, the limit value (about 3.85) stored in the limit value memory 202d. The MPU 201 limits the firing application voltage Eα input to the voltage supply unit 304 in the firing control device 400 to a constant value of about 3.85 volts. When the firing application voltage Eα input to the voltage supply unit 304 is limited to a constant value of about 3.85 volts, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 is limited to about 25.0 volts. Therefore, since the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 can be prevented from becoming an overvoltage, it is possible to prevent damage to the return rubber 69 and the like hit by the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142.

  Further, based on the limit value (about 3.85 volts) stored in the limit value memory 202d, about 25.0 volts which is the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 restricted by the MPU 201 is The voltage is set to less than the absolute maximum rating voltage value. Therefore, even if the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is increased more than necessary, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 does not exceed the absolute maximum rating of the firing solenoid 142. Can be prevented.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on each embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the gist of the present invention. Can be inferred.

  For example, the numerical values given in the respective embodiments are examples, and other numerical values can naturally be adopted.

  The pachinko machine of the first embodiment is configured so that the DC voltage input to the resistor R2 of the adder circuit unit 303 can be adjusted by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301, but is not necessarily limited thereto. Instead of the variable resistor VR2, a fixed resistor having a fixed resistance value may be used. In this case, the range width of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area that could be changed by the variable resistor VR2 (the rotation operation of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area) The difference between the minimum value of the amount and the maximum value of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area cannot be adjusted, and the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area cannot be adjusted. Naturally, the range of the rotation operation amount can be widened.

  In the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment, the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the adder circuit unit 303 can be adjusted by the variable resistor VR3 of the adder voltage adjustment unit 302. However, the invention is not necessarily limited thereto. Alternatively, instead of the variable resistor VR3, a fixed resistor having a fixed resistance value may be used. In this case, it is not possible to adjust the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 that is the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area that can be changed by the variable resistor VR3. Naturally, the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 that provides the firing strength at which the can be driven can be changed.

  In the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment, the DC voltage input to the resistor R2 of the adder circuit unit 303 can be adjusted by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301. However, the invention is not necessarily limited thereto. Instead, the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 may be input to the resistor R2 of the adder circuit unit 303. In this case, although the range width of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into the game area cannot be changed, the resistance R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 is controlled by the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302. By adjusting the DC voltage input to the game area, it is possible to adjust the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 which is the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area.

  In the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment, the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the adder circuit unit 303 can be adjusted by the variable resistor VR3 of the adder voltage adjustment unit 302. However, the invention is not necessarily limited thereto. Alternatively, even if the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 is deleted and the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 is directly input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the voltage adjustment unit 304. good. In this case, the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into the game area cannot be changed. However, the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 is used to change the operational amplifier OP3 of the voltage adjustment unit 304. By adjusting the DC voltage input to the plus input terminal (non-inverted input terminal), the range width of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 which becomes the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area can be adjusted.

  Further, the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment is not provided with the limiter unit 309 provided in the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The first embodiment A limiter unit 309 may be provided in the pachinko machine. In this case, the anode terminal of the diode D4 of the limiter unit 309 and the other end of the resistor 14 are connected to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the voltage supply unit 304 of the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. . A power source that outputs a DC voltage of 3.85 volts may be connected to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6 of the limiter unit 304. Thereby, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 that is changed by the turning operation of the operation handle 51 can be set to a constant voltage of 25.0 volts by the limiter unit 309.

  In addition, by making the DC voltage of the power source connected to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6 of the limiter unit 304 smaller than 3.85 volts, the firing solenoid 142 that changes according to the turning operation of the operation handle 51 is changed. The maximum value of the applied voltage E1 can be made smaller than 25.0 volts. On the other hand, by setting the DC voltage of the power source connected to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6 of the limiter unit 304 to be larger than 3.85 volts, the firing solenoid 142 that changes according to the turning operation of the operation handle 51 is changed. The maximum value of the applied voltage E1 can be greater than 25.0 volts.

  Further, the pachinko machine of the first embodiment is not provided with the handle monitoring unit 307 and the voltage raising unit 308. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the handle monitoring unit provided in the second embodiment is not limited thereto. The unit 307 and the voltage raising unit 308 may be provided in the launch control device 300 of the first embodiment. In this case, for example, one end of a fixed resistor having the same resistance value as the resistor R2 and the resistor R3 is connected in parallel with the resistor R2 and the resistor R3 to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP2 of the adder circuit unit 303. The output terminal of the operational amplifier OP5 of the voltage raising unit 308 is connected to the other end of the fixed resistor. Then, the negative input terminal (inverted input terminal) of the comparator OP4 of the handle monitoring unit 307 is connected to the positive input terminal (non-inverted input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP1 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301. With this configuration, the direct current voltage divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 and the direct current generated in the variable resistor VR3 of the adding voltage adjusting unit 302 are output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP2 of the adding circuit unit 303. A DC voltage obtained by adding the voltage and the DC voltage generated at the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP5 of the voltage raising unit 308 is output. Therefore, when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the DC voltage input from the operational amplifier OP5 of the voltage boosting unit 308 to the fixed resistor of the adding circuit unit 303 is about 2.45 volts to about 4.90. Switch to bolts. Here, when the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the adder circuit unit 303 is about 4.90 volts, the DC voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310 is sent from the launch solenoid 142 through the launch port 68a. It is set so that the ball fired through the rail 62 moves along the rail 62 and has a firing strength that reaches the return rubber 69. That is, when the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the adding circuit unit 303 is about 4.90 volts, the DC voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310 is the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142. Is set to be approximately 25.0 volts, which is a voltage value capable of reliably firing a right-handed ball. Therefore, when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the ball launched from the firing solenoid 142 to the game area can be reliably hit along the rail 62 and hit the rubber 69. Can be played reliably.

  Further, the pachinko machine of each embodiment generates a DC voltage input to the resistor R2 of the adder circuit unit 303 by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301, and inputs a DC voltage to the resistor R3 of the adder circuit unit 303. Is generated by the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302, but is not necessarily limited thereto, and the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 and the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 are made to be resistors. Instead of the resistor having a fixed value, a DC voltage input to the resistor R2 of the adding circuit unit 303 and a DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the adding circuit unit 303 may be generated. When a DC voltage that is input to the resistor R2 of the adder circuit unit 303 and a DC voltage that is input to the resistor R3 of the adder circuit unit 303 are generated using a resistor having a fixed resistance value, the resistance value is fixed. Therefore, the DC voltage input to the resistor R2 of the adder circuit unit 303 and the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the adder circuit unit 303 cannot be readjusted, but generally the resistance value is fixed by a variable resistor. Since the resistance is less expensive, the costs of the launch control device 112 and the launch control device 300 can be reduced.

  In addition, the pachinko machine of each embodiment is configured to output the launch control signal α and the ball feed control signal β input to the launch control device 112 from the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110. The launch control signal α and the ball feed control signal β input to the launch control device 112 are launched from the input / output port 215 of the payout control device 111 or the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113. You may comprise so that it may output to the control apparatus 112.

  In the pachinko machine of each embodiment, the signal conversion circuit 241 is provided in the payout control device 111. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the signal conversion circuit 241 is provided in the launch control device 112. Also good. In this case, it is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the signal conversion is performed on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The launch permission signal SG3 output from the circuit 241 is output from the signal conversion circuit 241 provided in the launch control device 112 to the input / output port 205 and input to the main control device 110.

  In the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment, when the handle monitoring unit 307 detects that the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is greater than 105 degrees, the voltage applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage raising unit 308. The maximum value of E1 was increased to about 25.0 volts, which is a voltage value that can reliably fire the right-handed ball. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the operation amount of the operation handle 51 detected by the handle monitoring unit 307 (the operation handle for increasing the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage increasing unit 308). 51, for example, may be set to 105 degrees or less, or may be set to be greater than 105 degrees.

  When the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 detected by the handle monitoring unit 307 is set to, for example, 105 degrees or less, the value obtained by dividing the resistance R9 of the handle monitoring unit 307 by the resistance R10 is set to the rotation of the operation handle 51. The resistance R9 of the handle monitoring unit 307 when the operation amount is 105 degrees is made smaller than a value obtained by dividing by the resistance R10. As a result, the DC voltage input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4 of the handle monitoring unit 307 decreases, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 detected by the handle monitoring unit 307 is set to 105 degrees or less. can do. Therefore, the right-handed ball can be fired from the firing solenoid 142 even when the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 becomes 105 degrees or less.

  Also, The rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 detected by the handle monitoring unit 307 is For example, when setting larger than 105 degrees, The value obtained by dividing the resistance R9 of the handle monitoring unit 307 by the resistance R10 is The resistance R9 of the handle monitoring unit 307 when the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is 105 degrees is made larger than the value obtained by dividing by the resistance R10. This The DC voltage input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4 of the handle monitoring unit 307 increases, The rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 detected by the handle monitoring unit 307 can be set larger than 105 degrees. Therefore, The rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 for firing the right-handed ball from the firing solenoid 142 is It can be greater than 105 degrees.

  The pachinko machine according to the second embodiment is provided with a limiter unit 309, and when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees by the limiter unit 309, regardless of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51, The maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 was 25.0 volts. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 when the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is greater than 105 degrees can surely fire the right-handed ball. Any voltage value can be used, for example, 23.0 volts.

  When the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 is set to 23.0 volts, for example, the voltage applied to the firing solenoid 142 is a value obtained by dividing the resistance R9 of the handle monitoring unit 307 by the resistance R10. The resistance R9 of the handle monitoring unit 307 when the maximum value of E1 is 25.0 volts is made smaller than the value divided by the resistance R10. As a result, the DC voltage input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6 of the limiter unit 309 decreases, and the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 is set to 23.0 volts, for example. be able to. In this case, it is possible to further reduce the damage to the return rubber 69 that the right hit ball fired by the firing solenoid 142 collides with.

  However, as described above, both the detection of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by the handle monitoring unit 307 and the setting of the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the limiter unit 309 are the resistance of the handle monitoring unit 307. Since R9 is performed by a value obtained by dividing R9 by the resistance R10 of the handle monitoring unit 307, the setting of only one of the handle monitoring unit 307 and the limiter unit 309 cannot be changed. When changing the setting of only one of the handle monitoring unit 307 and the limiter unit 309, the DC voltage input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4 of the handle monitoring unit 307 and the limiter unit 309 are changed. What is necessary is just to comprise so that the DC voltage input into the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of operational amplifier OP6 may be input from an independent separate circuit (DC voltage generating circuit etc.). With this configuration, the setting of only one of the handle monitoring unit 307 and the limiter unit 309 can be changed.

  The pachinko machine according to the second embodiment is provided with a limiter unit 309, and when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees by the limiter unit 309, regardless of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51, The maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 was 25.0 volts. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the limiter unit 309 may be deleted. According to this configuration, when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is greater than 105 degrees, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 can be set to a constant voltage of 25.0 volts by the limiter unit 309. In the case where the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the right-handed ball can be reliably fired from the firing solenoid 142.

  Further, the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment generates a DC voltage that is input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP2 of the adder circuit unit 303 in the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301. The DC voltage output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP5 of the voltage raising unit 308 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one end of a fixed resistor having the same resistance value as that of the resistor R2 and the resistor R3 is connected in parallel with the resistor R2 and the resistor R3 to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP2 of the adder circuit unit 303. A variable resistor having a variable resistance value is connected to the other end. Then, a DC power source that outputs a DC voltage is connected to one end of the variable resistor, and the other end of the variable resistor is grounded.

  With this configuration, when a DC voltage generated in the variable resistor is input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303, the voltage from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 is increased. DC voltage obtained by adding the DC voltage divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the fluctuation adjusting unit 301, the DC voltage generated at the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP5 of the voltage increasing unit 308, and the DC voltage generated at the variable resistor. Is output. Therefore, by adjusting the DC voltage input to the operational amplifier OP2 of the adder circuit unit 303 by the variable resistor, the range width of the operation amount of the operation handle 51 (the game area) which becomes the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area. If the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, which is the firing strength at which the ball is shot into, is in the range of 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less, the ball is in the game area without changing its range width (18 degrees). It is possible to change the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 that is the firing strength to be driven.

  In the pachinko machine of the third embodiment and the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, first, the MPU 201 reads the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2, and the DC voltage generated in the read variable resistor VR2 is read. The MPU 201 multiplies the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number, and then the MPU 201 reads the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3. The MPU 201 adds an offset voltage to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number using the DC voltage generated in the device VR3, and fires the firing applied voltage Eα. It was configured to output to the control device 400.

  However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, first, the MPU 201 reads the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3, and uses the DC voltage generated in the read variable resistor VR3. The MPU 201 adds an offset voltage to the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51. Next, the MPU 201 reads the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2, and generates it in the read variable resistor VR2. The MPU 201 multiplies the voltage obtained by adding the offset voltage to the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by using the DC voltage thus generated, and the firing applied voltage Eα is set to the firing control device 400. You may comprise so that it may output.

  In the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment and the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment, the magnification determination table stored in the magnification determination table memory 202a has a variable magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. Although it is set so as to increase in proportion to the voltage generated in the resistor VR2, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a magnification that is frequently used and multiplied by a positive real number is set finely. The magnification for multiplying a positive real number that is less frequently used may be set roughly.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 49, description will be given of a magnification determination table in which a magnification for multiplying a positive real number that is frequently used is finely set, and a magnification for multiplying a positive real number that is less frequently used is coarsely set. FIG. 49 shows the contents of the magnification determination table memory 202a.

  The magnification determination table stored in the magnification determination table memory 202a is generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 in accordance with the voltage change (from zero volts to 5 volts) generated in the variable resistor VR2. The magnification for multiplying the direct current voltage to a positive real number is set from zero to 2.0 times.

  However, in this magnification determination table, a magnification (from zero to 1.0) that is frequently used is multiplied by a positive real number, and a magnification (1.0 times) that is used less frequently is set as a positive real number. Larger and up to 2.0 times). Therefore, even when the change in the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 is from zero volts to 5 volts, by adjusting the variable resistor VR2 at a magnification that is frequently used and multiplied by a positive real number, The magnification can be finely adjusted. Therefore, according to this magnification determination table, the magnification for multiplying the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by the positive real number is finely adjusted at the magnification that is frequently used and multiplied by the positive real number. Can do.

  In the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment and the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment, the magnification determination table stored in the magnification determination table memory 202a is a magnification that multiplies the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. Is set so as to increase in proportion to the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is positive. It may be set so that the multiplication factor of the real number does not increase in proportion to the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2.

  Here, referring to FIG. 50, a magnification determination table in which the magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number is set so as not to increase in proportion to the voltage generated in variable resistor VR2. Will be described. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing the contents of the magnification determination table memory 202a.

  The magnification determination table stored in the magnification determination table memory 202a is generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 in accordance with the voltage change (from zero volts to 5 volts) generated in the variable resistor VR2. The magnification for multiplying the direct current voltage to a positive real number is set from zero to 2.0 times.

  However, this magnification determination table is set so that the magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number does not increase in proportion to the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2. Therefore, according to this magnification determination table, even if the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 is proportionally increased, the magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number is not proportionally increased. can do.

  In the pachinko machine of the third embodiment and the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, the offset voltage determination table stored in the offset voltage determination table memory 202b is a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. Is set to increase in proportion to the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an offset voltage that is frequently used is finely set. The offset voltage that is set and used less frequently may be set roughly.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 51, an offset voltage determination table in which offset voltages that are frequently used are set finely and offset voltages that are less frequently used are roughly set will be described. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing the contents of the offset voltage determination table memory 202b.

  The offset voltage determination table stored in the offset voltage determination table memory 202b is generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 in accordance with a change in the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 (from zero volts to 5 volts). The offset voltage applied to the positive DC voltage multiplied by a positive real number is set from -2.8 volts to 2.8 volts.

  However, in this offset voltage determination table, an offset voltage that is frequently used (from 2.0 volts to 2.8 volts) is set finely, and an offset voltage that is less frequently used (from -2.8 volts to 2.0 volts). (Less than bolts) is set coarsely. Therefore, even when the change in the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 is from zero volts to 5 volts, the offset voltage is finely adjusted by adjusting the variable resistor VR3 in the offset voltage that is frequently used. Can be adjusted. Therefore, according to the offset voltage determination table, the offset voltage applied to the voltage obtained by multiplying the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number is finely adjusted in the frequently used offset voltage. be able to.

  In the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment and the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment, the offset voltage determination table stored in the offset voltage determination table memory 202b is a positive real number multiple of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1. The offset voltage applied to the voltage is set so as to increase in proportion to the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the offset voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 The offset voltage applied to the voltage obtained by multiplying the existing voltage by a positive real number may be set so as not to increase in proportion to the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3.

  Here, referring to FIG. 52, an offset voltage applied to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number is set not to increase in proportion to the voltage generated in variable resistor VR3. The offset voltage determination table will be described. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing the contents of the offset voltage determination table memory 202b.

  The offset voltage determination table stored in the offset voltage determination table memory 202b is generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 in accordance with a change in the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 (from zero volts to 5 volts). The offset voltage applied to the positive DC voltage multiplied by a positive real number is set from -2.8 volts to 2.8 volts.

  However, this offset voltage determination table is set so that an offset voltage applied to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number is not increased in proportion to the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3. . Therefore, even if the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 increases proportionally, the offset voltage applied to the voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number can be set not to increase proportionally. .

  In the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment, the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than a specified value (105 degrees in the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment), that is, generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51. The monitoring memory 202c that stores the specified value in order for the MPU 201 to detect that the operating voltage has become larger than the specified value, and the firing applied voltage Eα that is output from the input / output port 205 to the firing control device 400 has a predetermined value. The limit value memory 202d for storing the limit value so as not to exceed is provided in the ROM 202. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, for example, a rewritable memory for storing various data in the power-on state. In addition, a flash memory, which is a memory that can retain the contents even after the power is shut down, is provided in the main controller 110, Of one monitoring memory 202c or limit value memory 202d in the flash memory, or may be provided both a monitoring memory 202c and limit value memory 202d.

  When the monitoring memory 202c is provided in the flash memory, the specified value as the voltage stored in the monitoring memory 202c can be rewritten. Thereby, the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 detected by the MPU 201 (the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 that causes the MPU 201 to increase the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142) is set to, for example, 105 degrees or less. Or larger than 105 degrees.

  When the limit value memory 202d is provided in the flash memory, the limit value as the voltage value stored in the limit value memory 202d can be rewritten. Thereby, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 that is changed by the turning operation of the operation handle 51 can be set to 25.0 volts or less, or can be set to be larger than 25.0 volts.

  In the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment, one specified value as a voltage stored in the monitoring memory 202c is stored. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a specified value as a voltage is stored in the monitoring memory 202c. A plurality of values may be stored. In this case, the MPU 201 stores one specified value selected by the setter who sets the state of the pachinko machine from a plurality of specified values stored in the monitoring memory 202 c in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Then, the MPU 201 uses a single specified value stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 203, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than the specified value (105 degrees in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment). That is, what is necessary is just to comprise so that it may detect that the voltage which generate | occur | produced in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 became larger than the regulation value. With this configuration, the specified value as the voltage stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 can be rewritten without using a flash memory. Therefore, the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 detected by the MPU 201 (MPU201). Can be set to 105 degrees or less, or larger than 105 degrees, for example, to increase the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142.

  In the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment, one limit value as a voltage stored in the limit value memory 202d is stored. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the voltage is stored in the limit value memory 202d. A plurality of limit values may be stored. In this case, the MPU 201 stores one limit value selected by the setter who sets the state of the pachinko machine from a plurality of limit values stored in the limit value memory 202 d in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Then, the MPU 201 is configured to limit the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 that is changed by the turning operation of the operation handle 51, using one limit value stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Just do it. With this configuration, it is possible to rewrite the limit value as a voltage stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 without using a flash memory, so that the firing solenoid 142 that changes according to the turning operation of the operation handle 51 can be used. The maximum value of the applied voltage E1 can be set to 25.0 volts or less, or can be set to be greater than 25.0 volts.

  Although 1st Embodiment demonstrated the command output to the payout control apparatus 111 from the main control apparatus 110, it is not necessarily limited to this, For example, the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 from the main control apparatus 110, and other The present invention may be applied to a command output to the peripheral control device. When applied to a command output to the audio lamp control device 113, it can be configured to perform a game effect only when a normal effect command is input, so that the game effect control is performed normally. Can be made. In such a case, the signal line is set so that adjacent pins are alternately set / reset according to the arrangement of the signal pins of the connectors 208 and 228 that connect the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113. Configure commands to detect shorts and solder bridges.

  When an abnormal command is input, the occurrence of a command error is notified by the 7-segment LED 121. Instead of this, a lamp (lamp display device (lighting unit) provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 is used instead. 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34))) may be turned on or blinked, or a predetermined error sound or the like may be output from a speaker (audio output device 226) for notification. Furthermore, the occurrence of the command error may be output to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal board 261. If the occurrence of the command error is output to the hall computer 262, the occurrence of the error can be immediately reported to the game hall manager. In addition, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured not to notify the command error but to output only to the hall computer 262, if a player enters an abnormal command as a result of cheating, It is possible to notify the manager of the game hall of the cheating without being noticed by the player who cheated. Therefore, it can be used for extracting fraudsters.

  Furthermore, although the first embodiment is applied to a command composed of 2 bytes, the present invention may be applied to a command composed of 3 bytes or more or a command composed of 1 byte. For example, when the command is composed of 3 bytes or more, addition or exclusive OR is performed on the first predetermined input data and the second predetermined input data, and the result is determined. . Further, the first predetermined input data and the second predetermined input data are set so that the outputs of the adjacent signal pins of the connector are alternately set / reset. On the other hand, when the command is composed of 1 byte, for example, addition or exclusive OR is performed on the upper 4 bits of data and the lower 4 bits of data, and the result is determined. In such a case, the command is output 4 bits at a time, and the 4-bit data is set so that the outputs of the adjacent signal pins of the connector are alternately set / reset.

  The command was output from the main controller 110 as 8-bit parallel data. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to output the data bit by bit by a serial method. In this case, data input by a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 is, for example, grouped together every 4 bits or 8 bits into one group of data, and the addition of the data of that group and the data of another group or An exclusive OR may be performed to check whether the output command is normal or not.

  Although the payout return command shown in FIG. 15 is composed of 9966H and the payout initialization command is composed of AA55H, it may be composed of AA66H and 9955H, 5566H and AA99H. Further, the connectors 207, 208, 217, and 228 are constituted by the two-row array connectors shown in FIG. 8B, and the output pins of the input / output port 205 of the main controller 111 that outputs commands to these connectors are arranged in one row. The input pins of the input / output ports 215 and 225 of the payout control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 for inputting commands output from these connectors may be arranged in a line.

  In the present embodiment, the winning that is detected by the winning detection means is that the ball that has been driven into the game area wins any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a. However, when the present invention is applied to a slot machine or a ball-carrying revolving game machine that uses a ball to perform a revolving game, the winning that is detected by the winning detection means is determined according to the operation of the start lever. The result will be the lottery performed on board.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a type different from the said embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area.

  The form of the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below. The gaming machine described in each claim is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments are shown. In a gaming machine comprising an operating member and first value changing means for changing a first value based on an operation amount of the operating member, second value output means for outputting a second value different from the first value; , A combining means for combining the first value changed by the first value changing means with the second value output by the second value output means, and the first value and the second value by the combining means. A gaming machine 1 comprising: a ball strength control unit that controls a firing strength of a ball launched from the launching unit based on the synthesized value. The first changing means changes the first value based on the operation amount of the operation member. When the first value that changes according to the operation amount of the operation member and the second value output from the second value output means are input to the combining means, the combining means combines the first value and the second value. Based on the value obtained by synthesizing the first value and the second value by the synthesizing means, the sphere intensity control means controls the firing intensity of the sphere launched from the emitting means. Therefore, the launch intensity of the sphere can be adjusted by the second value output from the second value output means in addition to the first value that varies depending on the operation amount of the operation member.

  A first voltage dividing means having at least a first variable resistor that changes a resistance value based on an operation amount of the operation member; and a DC voltage is supplied to the first voltage dividing means, and the first variable In a gaming machine comprising first DC voltage supply means for causing the first variable resistor to generate a voltage based on the resistance of the resistor, unlike the first DC voltage supply means, a second DC voltage supply means is provided. DC voltage supply means, addition means for adding the DC voltage supplied by the second DC voltage supply means to the voltage generated in the first variable resistor by the first DC voltage supply means, and the addition means 1. A gaming machine 2 comprising: control means for controlling the firing intensity of a ball fired from the launching means based on the output voltage that is output.

  In the above Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2000-202094, when adjusting the firing strength of a ball launched by a solenoid, the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob are rotated to mechanically move the solenoid up and down and back and forth. Since the launch intensity is adjusted, the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob are loosened due to changes over time. There is a problem in that a regulation launching intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle does not occur due to misalignment of the 1st adjusting knob and the 2nd adjusting knob, and the position where the solenoid pier collides with the ball. was there.

  Also, since the firing intensity is adjusted by rotating the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob to mechanically move the solenoid up and down and back and forth, the accuracy of the adjustment of the firing intensity is the first adjustment knob. In addition, it depends on the second adjustment knob, and there is a problem that the adjustment accuracy of the prescribed launch intensity according to the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle is low.

  According to the gaming machine 2, since the DC voltage is supplied from the first DC voltage supply means to the first voltage dividing means, the resistance value of the first variable resistor is changed based on the operation amount of the operation member. The DC voltage generated in the first variable resistor changes. When a DC voltage that changes according to the operation amount of the operation member and a DC voltage supplied by the second DC voltage supply means are input to the addition means, the addition means causes a DC voltage that changes according to the operation amount of the operation member, A voltage obtained by adding the DC voltage supplied by the second DC voltage supply means is output. Then, based on the output voltage output from the adding means, the control means controls the firing intensity of the sphere launched from the launching means. In this way, the launch intensity of the sphere can be adjusted by the DC voltage supplied by the second DC voltage supply means in addition to the DC voltage that varies depending on the operation amount of the operation member.

  Here, in order to drive a ball into a game area where a prize opening or the like is arranged, the operating member must be operated and adjusted so that the firing strength of the ball is within a specified range. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 10, the operation amount of the operation member that is the firing strength at which the ball is driven is set to an arbitrary range including 65 degrees that is the target value of the operation amount of the operation member.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 10 (b), due to individual differences such as the first variable resistor, the range of operation amount of the operation member that is the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area, for example, is 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees In some cases, the ball could not be shot into the game area at the target value of the operation amount of the operation member of 65 degrees.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine 2, as shown in FIG. 10 (a), by adjusting the firing strength of the sphere by the DC voltage input from the second DC voltage supply means to the adding means, For example, the range of the operation amount of the operation member, which is the firing strength with which the ball is shot, can be changed from 57 degrees to 75 degrees. Therefore, it is possible to adjust the range of the operation amount of the operation member that is the firing strength at which the ball is shot into the game area so as to include the target value of the operation amount of the operation member of 65 degrees.

  Further, the launch intensity of the sphere is adjusted by a DC voltage input from the second DC voltage supply means to the adding means. In general, the DC voltage is easy to finely and accurately adjust and has the property of being resistant to changes over time (not easily distorted), so the range of operation amount of the operation member that is the firing strength at which the ball is shot into the game area is precisely and precisely The adjustment can be made strong against changes with time (hard to go wrong).

  In the gaming machine 2, the voltage value of the DC voltage input from the second DC voltage supply means to the adding means is variable. Since the DC voltage input from the second DC voltage supply means to the adding means is variable, the DC voltage can be finely adjusted. Here, the DC voltage input from the second DC voltage supply means to the adding means is added to the voltage generated in the first variable resistor by the adding means. Therefore, the voltage value of the output voltage output from the adding means is changed (slightly) while making the fluctuation range of the output voltage output from the adding means substantially the same as the fluctuation width of the voltage generated in the first variable resistor. Adjustment). Therefore, it is possible to change (finely adjust) the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the launching means.

  In the gaming machine 2 or 3, the second DC voltage supply means supplies a second voltage dividing means having at least a second variable resistor capable of adjusting a resistance value, and supplies a DC voltage to the second voltage dividing means. Power supply means for causing the second variable resistor to generate a voltage based on the resistance of the second variable resistor, and a DC voltage generated in the second variable resistor is input to the adding means. A gaming machine 4 to play. Since the DC voltage is supplied from the power supply means to the second voltage dividing means, the DC voltage input from the second variable resistor to the adding means can be changed by changing the resistance value of the second variable resistor. it can. Therefore, by changing the output voltage output from the adding means to the control means using a second variable resistor having a simple structure and inexpensive without using a power supply circuit or the like constituted by complicated circuits, Can be changed (fine tuned).

  Any one of the gaming machines 2 to 4, further comprising constant voltage means for making a voltage applied to the second voltage dividing means constant. Since constant voltage means for making the DC voltage applied to the second voltage dividing means constant is provided, even if the voltage value of the DC voltage supplied to the second voltage dividing means by the power supply means fluctuates, The voltage applied to the means is a stable and constant value. Therefore, the DC voltage input to the adding means from the second variable resistor disposed in the second voltage dividing means is stabilized, and the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine 5, the constant voltage means is constituted by a Zener diode. The voltage applied to the second voltage dividing means is made constant by the Zener diode. Therefore, the input from the second variable resistor arranged in the second voltage dividing means is input to the adding means by using a Zener diode having a simple structure and inexpensive without using a constant voltage circuit constituted by a complicated circuit. The direct current voltage to be stabilized can be stabilized, and the firing intensity of the sphere launched from the launching means can be stabilized.

  In a gaming machine comprising an operating member and first value changing means for changing a first value based on an operation amount of the operating member, a change amount of the first value changed by the first value changing means is: Based on the conversion means for converting to a second value that is a change amount smaller than the change amount of the first value, and the second value to be converted by the conversion means, the firing intensity of the sphere emitted from the launching means is controlled. A gaming machine 7 comprising strength control means. The first value changes based on the operation amount of the operation member, and the first value is converted into a second value that is a change amount smaller than the change amount of the first value by the conversion means. Then, the intensity control means controls the firing intensity of the sphere launched from the launching means based on the second value converted by the converting means. Therefore, by changing the first value that changes based on the operation amount of the operation member to the second value by the conversion means, the amount of change in the firing intensity of the sphere that is emitted by the emission means according to the operation amount of the operation member is also Can be small.

  A first voltage dividing means having at least a first variable resistor that changes a resistance value based on an operation amount of the operation member; and a DC voltage is supplied to the first voltage dividing means, and the first variable In a gaming machine comprising a first DC voltage supply means for generating a voltage based on the resistance of the resistor in the first variable resistor, a voltage dividing means for dividing the voltage generated in the first variable resistor; And a first control means for controlling the firing intensity of the ball launched from the launching means based on the output voltage outputted from the voltage dividing means. When the resistance value of the first variable resistor changes based on the operation amount of the operation member, the voltage generated in the first variable resistor changes. The voltage generated in the first variable resistor is divided by voltage dividing means. Based on the voltage divided by the voltage dividing means, the firing intensity of the sphere emitted from the launching means is controlled by the first control means. Therefore, by dividing the voltage generated in the first variable resistor by the voltage dividing means, it is possible to reduce the amount of change in the launch intensity of the sphere launched by the launching means in accordance with the operation amount of the operating member. .

  A first voltage dividing means having at least a first variable resistor that changes a resistance value based on an operation amount of the operation member; and a DC voltage is supplied to the first voltage dividing means, and the first variable In a gaming machine comprising a first DC voltage supply means for generating a voltage based on the resistance of the resistor in the first variable resistor, a voltage dividing means for dividing the voltage generated in the first variable resistor; Unlike the first DC voltage supply means, the second DC voltage supply means for supplying a DC voltage and the DC voltage supplied by the second DC voltage supply means are divided by the voltage dividing means. An gaming machine comprising: an adding means for adding to the voltage; and a second control means for controlling the firing intensity of the ball launched from the launching means based on the output voltage output from the adding means. 9. When the resistance value of the first variable resistor changes based on the operation amount of the operation member, the voltage generated in the first variable resistor changes. The voltage generated in the first variable resistor is divided by voltage dividing means. When the voltage divided by the voltage dividing means and the DC voltage supplied by the second DC voltage supplying means are input to the adding means, the adding means outputs the voltage divided by the voltage dividing means and the first voltage. 2 A voltage obtained by adding the DC voltage supplied by the DC voltage supply means is output. Based on the output voltage output from the adding means, the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the launching means is controlled by the second control means. Thus, the launch intensity of the sphere can be adjusted by the voltage divided by the voltage dividing means in addition to the DC voltage supplied by the second DC voltage supplying means.

  Here, in order to drive a ball into a game area in which a winning opening or the like is disposed, the operation member must be operated and adjusted so that the firing strength of the ball falls within a specified range. In addition, the operation amount of the operation member, which is the firing strength at which the ball is shot into the game area, is set to an arbitrary range including 65 degrees, which is the target value of the operation amount of the operation member, as shown in FIG.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 11 (b), due to individual differences such as the first variable resistor, the range of operation amount of the operation member that becomes the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area, for example, is 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees In some cases, the ball could not be shot into the game area at the target value of the operation amount of the operation member of 65 degrees. In that case, according to the gaming machine 9, when the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is divided by the voltage dividing means, the resistance value of the first variable resistor is changed by the operation of the operation member. The fluctuation range of the voltage output from the voltage dividing means that changes to 1 can be made smaller than the fluctuation range of the voltage generated in the first variable resistor. Since the voltage divided by the voltage dividing means becomes the voltage input to the adding means, the fluctuation range of the output voltage output from the adding means can also be reduced. Since the launch intensity of the sphere is determined based on the output voltage output from the adding means to the second control means, the fluctuation range of the launch intensity of the sphere can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to change the range of the operation amount of the operation member that is the firing strength at which the ball is shot into the game area (for example, the operation amount of the operation member that is the shot strength at which the ball is shot into the game area is 66 degrees or more 84). The range of degrees or less can be changed to a wide range of 23 degrees or more and 77 degrees or less (see FIG. 11)). Therefore, it is possible to adjust the range of the operation amount of the operation member, which is the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area, so as to include, for example, 65 degrees that is the target value of the operation amount of the operation member.

  Note that the voltage divided by the voltage dividing means is smaller than the voltage generated in the first variable resistor. Can be supplemented by voltage. Thereby, the fluctuation | variation width | variety of a ball | bowl launch intensity | strength can be made small, setting the launch intensity | strength of the ball | bowl with respect to the operation amount of an operation member as the launch intensity | strength for driving a ball | bowl into a game area.

  In addition, since the range of the operation amount of the operation member that becomes the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area can be changed, the range of the operation amount of the operation member that becomes the launch strength at which the ball is driven into the game area is widened. (For example, the operation amount of the operation member, which is the firing strength at which a ball is shot into the game area, is in the range of 66 degrees to 84 degrees, and the range width of 18 degrees is changed to a range of 23 degrees to 77 degrees) The range width can be set to 54 degrees (see FIG. 11)). Accordingly, it is possible to finely adjust the firing strength for driving a ball into the game area according to the operation amount of the operation member.

  Furthermore, the firing intensity of the sphere is adjusted by the voltage (DC voltage) divided by the voltage dividing means and the DC voltage supplied by the second DC voltage supply means. Generally, the direct current voltage is easy to finely and accurately adjust, and has a property that is resistant to changes with time (not easily distorted). The width can be finely and accurately adjusted, and the adjustment can be made resistant to change with time (not easily distorted).

  The gaming machine 9 includes first voltage changing means for changing a voltage value input from the voltage dividing means to the adding means. Since the first voltage changing means is provided, the voltage value input from the voltage dividing means to the adding means can be changed (finely adjusted). Therefore, the voltage value input from the voltage dividing means to the adding means is changed (finely adjusted) by the first voltage changing means, thereby changing (finely adjusting) the output voltage output from the adding means to the control means, The launch intensity of the sphere can be changed (fine-tuned).

  In the gaming machine 10, the first voltage changing means is configured by a variable resistor capable of adjusting a resistance value. Since the first voltage changing means is composed of a variable resistor whose resistance value can be adjusted, the voltage value input from the voltage dividing means to the adding means by changing the resistance value of the first voltage changing means. Can be changed (fine-tuned). Thereby, the output voltage output from the adding means to the control means can be changed (finely adjusted), and the launch intensity of the sphere can be changed (finely adjusted). Here, in general, the variable resistor has a simple configuration and is inexpensive as compared with a power supply circuit or the like configured by a complicated circuit. Accordingly, it is possible to change (finely adjust) the launch intensity of the sphere using a variable resistor having a simple configuration and low cost.

  Any of the gaming machines 9 to 11, further comprising second voltage changing means for changing a voltage value inputted from the second DC voltage supply means to the adding means. Since the second voltage changing means is provided, the voltage input from the second DC voltage supply means to the adding means can be changed (finely adjusted). Here, the DC voltage input from the second DC voltage supply means to the adding means is added to the voltage divided by the voltage dividing means by the adding means. Therefore, the voltage value of the output voltage output from the adding unit is changed (slightly changed while the fluctuation range of the output voltage output from the adding unit is substantially the same as the fluctuation range of the voltage divided by the voltage dividing unit. Adjustment).

  In the gaming machine 12, the second voltage changing means is composed of a variable resistor capable of adjusting a resistance value. Since the second voltage changing means is composed of a variable resistor whose resistance value can be adjusted, it is inputted from the second DC voltage supply means to the adding means by changing the resistance value of the second voltage changing means. The voltage value can be changed (finely adjusted). Therefore, the output voltage output from the adding means to the control means can be changed (finely adjusted), and the launch intensity of the sphere can be changed (finely adjusted). Here, in general, the variable resistor has a simple configuration and is inexpensive as compared with a power supply circuit or the like configured by a complicated circuit. Accordingly, it is possible to change (finely adjust) the launch intensity of the sphere using a variable resistor having a simple configuration and low cost.

  In the gaming machine 12 or 13, the gaming machine 14 is provided with constant voltage means for making the voltage applied to the second voltage changing means constant. Since the constant voltage means for making the voltage applied to the second voltage changing means constant is provided, the voltage applied to the second voltage changing means becomes a stable constant value. Therefore, the voltage input from the second voltage changing unit to the adding unit can be stabilized. Therefore, the output voltage output from the adding means can be stabilized, and the launch intensity of the sphere can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine 14, the constant voltage means is constituted by a Zener diode. The voltage applied to the second voltage changing means is made constant by the Zener diode. Therefore, the voltage input from the second voltage changing unit to the adding unit can be stabilized. Thereby, the output voltage output from the addition means can also be stabilized, and the launch intensity of the sphere can be stabilized. Here, in general, a Zener diode has a simple configuration and is inexpensive compared to a constant voltage circuit or the like configured by a complicated circuit. Therefore, the voltage value input from the second voltage changing unit to the adding unit can be stabilized by using an inexpensive Zener diode having a simple configuration, and the launch intensity of the sphere can be stabilized.

  An operating member, a detecting means for detecting an operation amount of the operating member, a launching means for launching a sphere, and a launch intensity for controlling the launch intensity of the sphere launched from the launching means based on a detection value of the detecting means In the gaming machine comprising the control means, the control means controls the firing intensity of the sphere emitted from the launching means based on the first relationship when the detection value of the detection means is in the first range. And a second control means for controlling a firing intensity of a sphere launched from the launching means based on a second relationship when the detection value of the detecting means is in a second range. The launch intensity of the sphere launched from the launch means controlled by the second control means is greater than the launch intensity of the sphere launched from the launch means controlled by the first control means. Is configured as Gaming machine 16, wherein the door. When the detection means detects the operation amount of the operation member and the detection amount is in the first range, the first control means controls the firing intensity of the sphere emitted from the launching means based on the first relationship. . On the other hand, when the detection amount by the detection means is in the second range, the second control means controls the firing intensity of the sphere launched from the launching means based on the second relationship. Here, the launch intensity of the sphere launched from the launch means controlled by the second control means is configured to be greater than the launch intensity of the sphere launched from the launch means controlled by the first control means. Yes. Therefore, when the detection amount by the detection means is changed from the first range to the second range, the emission intensity of the sphere emitted from the emission means can be switched to increase the emission intensity.

  A first voltage dividing means having at least a first variable resistor that changes a resistance value based on an operation amount of the operation member; and a DC voltage is supplied to the first voltage dividing means, and the first variable In a gaming machine comprising first DC voltage supply means for generating a voltage based on the resistance of a resistor in the first variable resistor, unlike the first DC voltage supply means, a reference voltage for outputting a reference voltage An output means, a reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means, and a voltage generated in the first variable resistor are respectively input, and the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is the reference voltage output means. A first voltage output means for outputting a predetermined DC voltage when the reference voltage is greater than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output or when the reference voltage is greater than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means, and the first voltage output means. An adding means for adding a voltage to be applied to a voltage generated in the first variable resistor, a voltage associated with an output voltage output from the adding means, and a launching means based on the input voltage A gaming machine 17 comprising control means for controlling the firing intensity of a ball to be fired. When the resistance value of the first variable resistor changes based on the operation amount of the operation member, the voltage generated in the first variable resistor changes. The voltage generated in the first variable resistor and the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means are input to the first voltage output means. Then, the first voltage output means is used when the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is larger than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means or when it is equal to or higher than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means. Outputs a predetermined DC voltage. The predetermined DC voltage output from the first voltage output means is added by the adding means with the voltage generated in the first variable resistor, and is output from the adding means. A voltage associated with the output voltage output from the adding means is input to the control means, and based on the input voltage, the control means controls the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means. Thus, when the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is greater than the reference voltage or greater than the reference voltage, that is, when the operation amount of the operation member is greater than the specified value or greater than the specified value, the first The voltage output means outputs a predetermined DC voltage to the adding means. Therefore, when the operation amount of the operation member is greater than the specified value or greater than the specified value, the launch intensity of the sphere can be reliably switched to a predetermined intensity.

  A first voltage dividing means having at least a first variable resistor that changes a resistance value based on an operation amount of the operation member; and a DC voltage is supplied to the first voltage dividing means, and the first variable In a gaming machine comprising first DC voltage supply means for generating a voltage based on the resistance of a resistor in the first variable resistor, unlike the first DC voltage supply means, a reference voltage for outputting a reference voltage An output means, a reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means, and a voltage generated in the first variable resistor are respectively input, and the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is the reference voltage output means. Generated in the first variable resistor and the first voltage output means for outputting a predetermined DC voltage when the reference voltage is greater than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage or higher than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means. A voltage dividing means for dividing the voltage; an adding means for adding the voltage divided by the voltage dividing means and the voltage output by the first voltage output means; and an output output from the adding means A gaming machine comprising: a control means for inputting a voltage associated with the voltage and controlling a firing intensity of a ball launched from the launching means based on the inputted voltage. When the resistance value of the first variable resistor changes based on the operation amount of the operation member, the voltage generated in the first variable resistor changes. The voltage generated in the first variable resistor and the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means are input to the first voltage output means. Then, the first voltage output means is used when the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is larger than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means or when it is equal to or higher than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means. Outputs a predetermined DC voltage. The predetermined DC voltage output by the first voltage output means is added by the adding means by the voltage obtained by dividing the voltage generated in the first variable resistor by the voltage dividing means, and is output from the adding means. A voltage associated with the output voltage output from the adding means is input to the control means, and based on the input voltage, the control means controls the firing intensity of the sphere launched from the launching means. Thus, when the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is greater than the reference voltage or greater than the reference voltage, that is, when the operation amount of the operation member is greater than the specified value or greater than the specified value, the first The voltage output means outputs a predetermined DC voltage to the adding means. Therefore, when the operation amount of the operation member is greater than the specified value or greater than the specified value, the launch intensity of the sphere can be reliably switched to a predetermined intensity.

  A first voltage dividing means having at least a first variable resistor that changes a resistance value based on an operation amount of the operation member; and a DC voltage is supplied to the first voltage dividing means, and the first variable In a gaming machine comprising first DC voltage supply means for generating a voltage based on the resistance of a resistor in the first variable resistor, unlike the first DC voltage supply means, a reference voltage for outputting a reference voltage An output means, a reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means, and a voltage generated in the first variable resistor are input, respectively, and the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is the reference voltage output means. When the voltage is equal to or lower than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means or less than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means, the first DC voltage is output, and the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is the reference voltage. Voltage output A second voltage output for outputting a second DC voltage having a voltage value higher than the first DC voltage when the reference voltage is higher than the reference voltage output by the means or when the reference voltage is higher than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means. And an adding means for adding the voltage output from the second voltage output means to the voltage generated in the first variable resistor, and a voltage associated with the output voltage output from the adding means. And a control means for controlling the firing intensity of a ball fired from the launching means based on the input voltage.

  In the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2000-202094, the adjustment error of the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob occurs, the position where the solenoid pier collides with the sphere shifts, and the launch strength of the sphere is weakened. Even if the manipulated variable is set to the maximum value, it is not possible to hit the ball against, for example, the return rubber (see FIG. 2) arranged at the right end of the game area where the ball fired by the solenoid flows down, so that a normal game is performed. There was a problem that could not.

  According to the gaming machine 19, the voltage generated in the first variable resistor changes as the resistance value of the first variable resistor changes based on the operation amount of the operation member. The voltage generated in the first variable resistor and the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means are input to the second voltage output means. Then, the second voltage output means is configured such that the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is lower than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means or less than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means. When the first DC voltage is output and the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is greater than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means or greater than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means Outputs a second DC voltage having a voltage value higher than the first DC voltage. The DC voltage output from the second voltage output means is added by the adding means with the voltage generated in the first variable resistor, and is output from the adding means. A voltage associated with the output voltage output from the adding means is input to the control means, and based on the input voltage, the control means controls the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means. Thus, when the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is greater than the reference voltage or greater than the reference voltage, that is, when the operation amount of the operation member is greater than the defined value or greater than the defined value, the second The voltage output means switches the voltage input to the adding means from the first DC voltage to the second DC voltage. Here, the second DC voltage is set to a voltage value larger than the first DC voltage. Therefore, when the operation amount of the operation member is greater than the specified value or greater than the specified value, the launch intensity of the sphere can be reliably switched to a predetermined intensity. In addition, the second voltage output means detects a voltage (DC voltage) generated in the first variable resistor when the operation amount of the operation member is greater than a specified value or more than a specified value, and a reference voltage output means. This is done by comparing with the reference voltage (DC voltage) output by. In general, a DC voltage is accurate and has a property that is resistant to change with time (not easily distorted). Therefore, the second voltage output means can accurately detect when the amount of operation of the operation member is greater than the specified value or greater than the specified value, and can make the detection more resistant to change with time (not easily deviated).

  A first voltage dividing means having at least a first variable resistor that changes a resistance value based on an operation amount of the operation member; and a DC voltage is supplied to the first voltage dividing means, and the first variable In a gaming machine comprising first DC voltage supply means for generating a voltage based on the resistance of a resistor in the first variable resistor, unlike the first DC voltage supply means, a reference voltage for outputting a reference voltage An output means, a reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means, and a voltage generated in the first variable resistor are input, respectively, and the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is the reference voltage output means. When the voltage is equal to or lower than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means or less than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means, the first DC voltage is output, and the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is the reference voltage. Voltage output A second voltage output for outputting a second DC voltage having a voltage value higher than the first DC voltage when the reference voltage is higher than the reference voltage output by the means or when the reference voltage is higher than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means. The voltage dividing means for dividing the voltage generated in the first variable resistor, the voltage divided by the voltage dividing means, and the voltage output by the second voltage output means. An adding means; and a control means for inputting a voltage associated with the output voltage output from the adding means and controlling the firing intensity of a sphere launched from the launching means based on the input voltage. A gaming machine 20 characterized.

  When the resistance value of the first variable resistor changes based on the operation amount of the operation member, the voltage generated in the first variable resistor changes. The voltage generated in the first variable resistor and the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means are input to the second voltage output means. Then, the second voltage output means is configured such that the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is lower than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means or less than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means. When the first DC voltage is output and the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is greater than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means or greater than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means Outputs a second DC voltage having a voltage value higher than the first DC voltage. The DC voltage output by the second voltage output means is added by the voltage adding means by the voltage obtained by dividing the voltage generated in the first variable resistor by the voltage dividing means, and is output from the adding means. A voltage associated with the output voltage output from the adding means is input to the control means, and based on the input voltage, the control means controls the firing intensity of the sphere launched from the launching means. Thus, when the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is greater than the reference voltage or greater than the reference voltage, that is, when the operation amount of the operation member is greater than the defined value or greater than the defined value, the second The voltage output means switches the voltage input to the adding means from the first DC voltage to the second DC voltage. Here, the second DC voltage is set to a voltage value larger than the first DC voltage. Therefore, when the operation amount of the operation member is greater than the specified value or greater than the specified value, the launch intensity of the sphere can be reliably switched to a predetermined intensity.

  In addition, the second voltage output means detects a voltage (DC voltage) generated in the first variable resistor when the operation amount of the operation member is greater than a specified value or more than a specified value, and a reference voltage output means. This is done by comparing with the reference voltage (DC voltage) output by. In general, a DC voltage is accurate and has a property that is resistant to change with time (not easily distorted). Therefore, the second voltage output means can accurately detect when the amount of operation of the operation member is greater than the specified value or greater than the specified value, and can make the detection more resistant to change with time (not easily deviated).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 32, in order to drive a ball into the game area, the operation member must be operated and adjusted so that the firing strength of the ball falls within a specified range. Then, the operation amount of the operation member that is the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area is set to an arbitrary range including 65 degrees that is the target value of the operation amount of the operation member, as shown in FIG. 32, for example. At this time, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), for example, due to individual differences such as the first variable resistor, the range of the operation amount of the operation member that becomes the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area is, for example, 66 degrees or more 84 In that case, the ball could not be shot into the game area at the target value of the operation amount of the operation member of 65 degrees. In that case, according to the gaming machine 20, when the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is divided by the voltage dividing means, the resistance value of the first variable resistor is changed by the operation of the operation member. The fluctuation range of the voltage output from the voltage dividing means that changes to 1 can be made smaller than the fluctuation range of the voltage generated in the first variable resistor. Since the voltage divided by the voltage dividing means becomes the voltage input to the adding means, the fluctuation range of the output voltage output from the adding means can also be reduced. Since the launch intensity of the sphere is determined based on the voltage accompanying the output voltage output from the adding means to the control means, the fluctuation range of the launch intensity of the sphere can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to change the range of the operation amount of the operation member that is the firing strength at which the ball is shot into the game area (for example, the operation amount of the operation member that is the shot strength at which the ball is shot into the game area is 66 degrees or more 84). The range of degrees or less can be changed to a range of 19 degrees or more and 105 degrees or less (see FIG. 32)). Therefore, it is possible to adjust the range of the operation amount of the operation member, which is the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area, so as to include, for example, 65 degrees that is the target value of the operation amount of the operation member. The voltage divided by the voltage dividing means is smaller than the voltage generated in the first variable resistor, but this reduced voltage is input to the adding means from the second voltage output means. It can be supplemented by a DC voltage. Thereby, the fluctuation | variation width | variety of a ball | bowl launch intensity | strength can be made small, setting the launch intensity | strength of the ball | bowl with respect to the operation amount of an operation member as the launch intensity | strength for driving a ball | bowl into a game area.

  In addition, since the range of the operation amount of the operation member that becomes the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area can be changed, the range of the operation amount of the operation member that becomes the launch strength at which the ball is driven into the game area is widened. (For example, when the operation amount of the operation member, which is the firing strength at which a ball is shot into the game area, is in the range of 66 degrees to 84 degrees and the range width is 18 degrees, it is 19 degrees to 105 degrees As a range, the range width can be changed to 86 degrees (see FIG. 32)). Accordingly, it is possible to finely adjust the firing strength for driving a ball into the game area according to the operation amount of the operation member.

  Further, the launch intensity of the sphere is adjusted by the voltage (DC voltage) divided by the voltage dividing means and the DC voltage supplied by the second voltage output means. Generally, the direct current voltage is easy to finely and accurately adjust, and has a property that is resistant to changes with time (not easily distorted). The width can be finely and accurately adjusted, and the adjustment can be made resistant to change with time (not easily distorted).

  Any of the gaming machines 17 to 20, further comprising a reference voltage constant pressure unit for making the reference voltage output from the reference voltage output unit constant. Since the reference voltage constant pressure unit for making the reference voltage output from the reference voltage output unit constant is provided, the reference voltage output from the reference voltage output unit becomes an accurate and stable constant value. Thereby, the first voltage output means or the second voltage output means accurately and stably compares the voltage generated in the first variable resistor by the operation of the operation member with the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means. Can be done. Therefore, the first voltage output means or the second voltage output means is configured such that when the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is greater than the reference voltage or greater than the reference voltage, that is, the operation amount of the operation member is less than the specified value. Detection when it is large or above a specified value can be performed accurately and stably. When the operation amount of the operation member is greater than the specified value or greater than the specified value, the first voltage output means or the second voltage output means adds from the first voltage output means or the second voltage output means. The DC voltage input to can be switched accurately and stably. Thereby, the voltage output from the addition means and input to the control means can also be switched accurately and stably. Therefore, when the operation amount of the operation member is greater than the specified value or greater than the specified value, the firing intensity of the sphere launched from the launching means can be switched accurately and stably.

  In the gaming machine 21, the reference voltage constant pressure unit is constituted by a shunt regulator circuit. The reference voltage output from the reference voltage output means is made constant by the shunt regulator circuit. Thereby, the first voltage output means or the second voltage output means accurately and stably compares the voltage generated in the first variable resistor by the operation of the operation member with the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means. Can be done. Therefore, the first voltage output means or the second voltage output means is configured such that when the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is greater than the reference voltage or greater than the reference voltage, that is, the operation amount of the operation member is less than the specified value. Detection when it is large or above a specified value can be performed accurately and stably. Here, in general, the shunt regulator circuit has a simple configuration and is inexpensive as compared with a constant voltage circuit or the like configured by a complicated circuit. Therefore, the first voltage output means or the second voltage output means uses a shunt regulator circuit that has a simple configuration and is inexpensive to detect when the operation amount of the operation member is greater than the specified value or greater than the specified value. Can be carried out accurately and stably.

  In either the gaming machine 17 or 18, or the gaming machine 21 or 22 subordinate to the gaming machine 17 or 18, the game area where the ball launched by the launching unit flows down is provided in one of the gaming areas, A launching unit in which a ball launched from the launching unit is launched into the game area; and a ball stopper member on which a ball launched from the launching unit can hit, and a predetermined voltage is applied from the first voltage output unit to the adding unit. When a DC voltage is output, the voltage input to the control means is set so that the sphere launched from the launching means via the launching unit has a launch intensity that reaches the ball stop member. A gaming machine 23 characterized by When the operation amount of the operating member is greater than the specified value or greater than the specified value, the first voltage output means outputs a predetermined DC voltage to the adding means. Then, an output voltage is output from the adding means, and a voltage associated with the output voltage is input to the control means. Here, the voltage input to the control means is set so that the sphere fired from the launching means via the launching unit has a firing strength that reaches the ball stopper. Therefore, when the operation amount of the operation member is larger than the prescribed value or more than the prescribed value, the ball launched from the launching means through the launching portion to the game area can be reliably applied to the ball stop member. The normal game can be surely performed.

  In either the gaming machine 19 or 20, or the gaming machine 21 or 22 subordinate to the gaming machine 19 or 20, a game area where a ball launched by the launching unit flows down is provided in one of the gaming areas, A launching unit in which a ball launched from the launching unit is launched into the game area; and a ball stopper member on which a ball launched from the launching unit can hit, and a second member from the second voltage output unit to the adding unit. When a DC voltage is output, the voltage input to the control means is set so that the sphere launched from the launching means via the launching unit has a launch intensity that reaches the ball stop member. A gaming machine 24 characterized by When the operation amount of the operating member is greater than the specified value or greater than the specified value, the second voltage output means outputs the second DC voltage to the adding means. Then, an output voltage is output from the adding means, and a voltage associated with the output voltage is input to the control means. Here, the voltage input to the control means is set so that the sphere fired from the launching means via the launching unit has a firing strength that reaches the ball stopper. Therefore, when the operation amount of the operation member is larger than the prescribed value or more than the prescribed value, the ball launched from the launching means through the launching portion to the game area can be reliably applied to the ball stop member. The normal game can be surely performed.

  In any of the gaming machines 17 to 24, a constant voltage supply means for supplying a constant DC voltage, a DC voltage supplied by the constant voltage supply means, and a voltage input to the control means are respectively input. When the voltage input to the control means is greater than the DC voltage supplied from the constant voltage supply means or greater than or equal to the DC voltage supplied from the constant voltage supply means, the voltage input to the control means is predetermined. A gaming machine 25, comprising voltage limiting means for limiting the voltage to a predetermined voltage. When the voltage input to the control means that changes in accordance with the operation amount of the operation member is greater than the DC voltage supplied by the constant voltage supply means or more than the DC voltage supplied by the constant voltage supply means, the voltage limiting means Thus, the voltage input to the control means is limited to a predetermined voltage. Therefore, when the operation amount of the operation member is larger than the specified value or more than the specified value, the voltage input to the control means is limited to a predetermined voltage by the voltage limiting means, and the operation amount of the operation member is increased. However, the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the launching means is constant. Thereby, when the operation amount of the operation member is larger than the specified value or more than the specified value, the voltage applied to the firing means by the control means is constant even if the operation amount of the operation member is increased more than necessary. It becomes. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the voltage applied to the launching means from becoming an overvoltage, so that deterioration of the launching means can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine 25, the predetermined voltage limited by the voltage limiting means is a DC voltage supplied by the constant voltage supply means. The voltage limiting means compares the voltage input to the control means that changes according to the operation amount of the operating member with the DC voltage supplied by the constant voltage supply means. When the voltage input to the control means is greater than the DC voltage supplied from the constant voltage supply means or greater than or equal to the DC voltage supplied from the constant voltage supply means, the voltage limiting means is the voltage input to the control means. Start limiting. Thus, the voltage limiting means limits the voltage input to the control means to the DC voltage supplied from the constant voltage supply means. Here, the voltage limiting means includes a voltage value at which the voltage limiting means starts limiting the voltage input to the control means and a voltage value at which the voltage limiting means limits the voltage input to the control means. The DC voltage supplied by the supply means is used. As a result, both the DC voltage at which the voltage limiting means starts limiting the voltage input to the control means and the DC voltage at which the voltage limiting means limits the voltage input to the control means are combined into one constant voltage supply means. It can be determined by the DC voltage supplied. Accordingly, it is possible to set and change the direct current voltage for starting the restriction of the voltage input to the control means by the voltage limiting means and the direct current voltage for restricting the voltage input to the control means by the voltage limiting means.

  In the gaming machine 25 or 26, the constant voltage supply means is constituted by a reference voltage output means. Since the constant voltage supply means is composed of the reference voltage output means, the voltage input to the voltage limiting means becomes the reference voltage output from the reference voltage output means. Here, the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means is also input to the first voltage output means or the second voltage output means. Therefore, both the voltage input to the first voltage output means or the second voltage output means and the voltage input to the voltage limiting means can be supplied from one reference voltage output means that outputs the reference voltage. Accordingly, it is possible to eliminate the need for a dedicated power source that is necessary for the voltage limiting means to limit the voltage input to the control means.

  In any one of the gaming machines 25 to 27, the game area where the ball launched by the launching means flows down and one of the game areas is provided, and the ball launched from the launching means is launched into the game area. A launcher and a ball stopper that can be hit by a ball launched from the launcher, and the predetermined voltage limited by the voltage limiter is such that the ball launched from the launcher via the launcher is A gaming machine 28, wherein the gaming machine 28 is set to have a firing strength that reaches the ball stopper. When the operation amount of the operation member is greater than the specified value or greater than the specified value, the limiting unit limits the voltage input to the control unit to a predetermined voltage. Here, the predetermined voltage is set so that the sphere fired from the launching means through the launching unit has a launch intensity that reaches the ball stopper. Therefore, when the operation amount of the operation member is greater than the specified value or greater than the specified value, the ball launched from the launching means to the game area can be reliably applied to the ball stop member, and normal games can be performed. It can be done reliably. Further, since it is possible to prevent the voltage applied to the launching means from becoming an overvoltage, it is possible to prevent damage to the launching means and the ball stopper member to which the ball launched from the launching means hits.

  In any one of the gaming machine 18 or 20, or the gaming machines 21 to 28 subordinate to the gaming machine 18 or 20, a first voltage changing unit that changes a voltage value input from the voltage dividing unit to the adding unit is provided. A gaming machine 29 characterized by Since the first voltage changing means is provided, the voltage value input from the voltage dividing means to the adding means can be changed (finely adjusted). Therefore, it is possible to change (finely adjust) the voltage associated with the output voltage output from the adding means to the control means and change (finely adjust) the launch intensity of the sphere.

  In the gaming machine 29, the first voltage changing means is constituted by a variable resistor capable of adjusting a resistance value. Since it is composed of a variable resistor capable of adjusting the resistance value, the voltage value input from the voltage dividing means to the adding means is changed (finely adjusted) by changing the resistance value of the first voltage changing means. be able to. Thereby, the voltage accompanying the output voltage output from the adding means to the control means can be changed (finely adjusted), and the launch intensity of the sphere can be changed (finely adjusted). Here, in general, the variable resistor has a simple configuration and is inexpensive as compared with a power supply circuit or the like configured by a complicated circuit. Accordingly, it is possible to change (finely adjust) the launch intensity of the sphere using a variable resistor having a simple configuration and low cost.

  Based on a launching means for launching a sphere, an operating member, a first value changing means for changing a first value based on an operation amount of the operating member, and a first value changed by the first value changing means, In a gaming machine comprising a ball control means for controlling the firing intensity of a ball fired from the launching means, a set value means for setting a second value separately from the first value changed by the first value changing means And a synthesized value means for synthesizing the second value set by the set value means and the first value changed by the first value changing means, and the ball control means is synthesized by the synthesized value means. A gaming machine 31 characterized by controlling the launch intensity of a sphere launched from the launch means based on the obtained value.

  In the above Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2000-202094, when adjusting the firing strength of a ball launched by a solenoid, the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob are rotated to mechanically move the solenoid up and down and back and forth. Since the launch intensity is adjusted, the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob are loosened due to changes over time. There is a problem in that a regulation launching intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle does not occur due to misalignment of the 1st adjusting knob and the 2nd adjusting knob, and the position where the solenoid pier collides with the ball. was there.

  According to the gaming machine 31, the first value changing means changes the first value based on the operation amount of the operation member. When the first value that changes based on the operation amount of the operation member and the second value that is set by the setting value means are combined by the combined value means, the ball control means outputs a value that is combined by the combined value means. Based on, the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the launching means is controlled. Therefore, since the composite value means combines the second value with the first value that changes based on the operation amount of the operation member, the firing intensity of the sphere emitted from the launching means changes based on the operation amount of the operation member. In addition to the first value to be changed, it can also be changed by the second value set by the set value means.

  In the gaming machine 31, the first value changing means includes a first voltage dividing means having at least a variable resistor that changes a resistance value based on an operation amount of the operation member, and a DC voltage is applied to the first voltage dividing means. DC voltage supply means for supplying, the combined value means, the voltage value generated in the variable resistor by the DC voltage supplied by the DC voltage supply means as the first value, the first value as the first value A gaming machine 32 characterized by being combined with a second value set by a setting value means. Since the DC voltage is supplied from the DC voltage supply means to the first voltage dividing means, when the resistance value of the variable resistor changes based on the operation amount of the operation member, the voltage value generated in the variable resistor changes. . The synthesized value means synthesizes a voltage value that changes based on the operation amount of the operating member as a first value and a second value set by the set value means. Here, generally, synthesis of voltage values can be realized with a simple configuration. Therefore, by using the first value synthesized by the synthesized value means as the voltage value, the synthesized value means can synthesize the first value with the second value with a simple configuration.

  The gaming machine 31 or 32 includes conversion value means for multiplying the value synthesized by the synthesis value means by a positive real number, and the ball control means is based on the value multiplied by the positive real number by the conversion value means, A gaming machine 33 that controls the firing intensity of a ball fired from the launching means. The sphere control means controls the firing intensity of the sphere emitted from the launching means based on a value obtained by multiplying the value synthesized by the synthesis value means by a positive real number by the conversion value means. Here, the conversion value means can change the amount of change of the synthesized value that varies depending on the operation amount of the operation member by multiplying the value synthesized by the synthesis value means by a positive real number. Therefore, the conversion value means can change the amount of change in the launch intensity of the sphere that changes according to the operation amount of the operation member.

  Based on a launching means for launching a sphere, an operating member, a first value changing means for changing a first value based on an operation amount of the operating member, and a first value changed by the first value changing means, In a gaming machine comprising a ball control means for controlling the firing intensity of a ball fired from the launching means, the first value changed by the first value changing means is multiplied by a positive real number and converted to a third value. A gaming machine comprising conversion value means, wherein the ball control means controls the firing intensity of a ball launched from the launching means based on a third value converted by the conversion value means. 34. The first value changing means changes the first value based on the operation amount of the operation member. When the first value that changes based on the operation amount of the operating member is multiplied by a positive real number by the conversion value means and converted to the third value, the ball control means, based on the third value converted by the conversion value means, Controls the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the launching means. Here, since the conversion value means multiplies the first value that changes according to the operation amount of the operation member to a positive real number to obtain the third value, the change amount of the first value can be changed. Therefore, the conversion value means can change the amount of change in the launch intensity of the sphere that changes according to the operation amount of the operation member.

  In the gaming machine 34, the first value changing means includes a first voltage dividing means having at least a variable resistor that changes a resistance value based on an operation amount of the operation member, and a DC voltage is applied to the first voltage dividing means. A DC voltage supply means for supplying the conversion value means, wherein the voltage value generated in the variable resistor by the DC voltage supplied by the DC voltage supply means is the first value, and the first value is positive. A gaming machine 35 characterized by being converted to a third value by multiplying by a real number. Since the DC voltage is supplied from the DC voltage supply means to the first voltage dividing means, when the resistance value of the variable resistor changes based on the operation amount of the operation member, the voltage value generated in the variable resistor changes. . The conversion value means sets the voltage value that changes based on the operation amount of the operation member as a first value, and multiplies the first value by a positive real number to obtain a third value. Here, generally, multiplying the voltage value by a positive real number can be realized with a simple configuration. Therefore, the conversion value means can convert the first value into the third value with a simple configuration by using the first value that the conversion value means converts into the third value as the voltage value.

  In the gaming machine 34 or 35, apart from the first value changed by the first value changing means, a setting value means for setting a second value, a second value set by the setting value means, and the converted value means Composite value means for combining the third value converted by the control means, and the ball control means controls the firing intensity of the ball emitted from the launching means based on the value synthesized by the composite value means. A gaming machine 36, which is characterized by The sphere control means controls the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the launching means based on the value synthesized by the synthesized value means. Therefore, since the composite value means combines the second value with the third value obtained by changing the amount of change of the first value by the conversion value means, the launch intensity of the sphere launched from the launch means is added to the third value. Also, it can be changed by the second value set by the set value means.

  In any of the gaming machines 33 to 36, the magnification at which the conversion value means is multiplied by a positive real number is configured to be adjustable as a voltage value of a DC voltage, and the conversion value means is a magnification at which a resistance value can be adjusted. An adjustment variable resistor, a magnification adjustment power supply means for supplying a DC voltage to the magnification adjustment variable resistor, and a DC voltage supplied by the magnification adjustment power supply means generated in the magnification adjustment variable resistor A gaming machine 37, comprising: a magnification adjusting means for adjusting a voltage value of a DC voltage as a magnification for multiplying the positive real number based on a voltage value of the voltage. The magnification by which the conversion value means is multiplied by a positive real number is configured to be adjustable as a DC voltage value. The magnification adjustment means is generated in the variable resistor for magnification adjustment by the DC voltage supplied from the power supply means for magnification adjustment. Based on the voltage value of the applied voltage, the conversion value means adjusts the magnification by which the positive real number is multiplied. Therefore, by adjusting the resistance value of the variable resistor for magnification adjustment, it is possible to easily adjust the magnification at which the conversion value means multiplies the positive real number.

  In the gaming machine 37, the magnification adjustment means is a voltage adjustment voltage acquisition means for acquiring a voltage value of the voltage generated by the magnification adjustment variable resistor, and a voltage value acquired by the magnification adjustment voltage acquisition means. A game machine 38, comprising: a magnification adjustment voltage determination means for determining a voltage value of a DC voltage as a magnification for multiplying the positive real number. When the magnification adjustment voltage acquisition means acquires the voltage value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor for magnification adjustment, the conversion value means determines that the conversion value means is positive based on the acquired voltage value of the voltage. The voltage value of the DC voltage as a magnification that is multiplied by a real number is determined. Therefore, the voltage adjustment means for magnification adjustment can accurately determine the voltage value of the DC voltage as the magnification that the conversion value means multiplies to a positive real number.

  In the gaming machine 38, the voltage adjustment means for magnification adjustment acquires a voltage value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor for magnification adjustment at the time of initialization of the gaming machine 39. . The magnification adjustment voltage acquisition means acquires the voltage value of the voltage generated in the magnification adjustment variable resistor when the gaming machine is initialized. Therefore, after initialization of the gaming machine, the magnification adjustment voltage acquisition means does not need to acquire the voltage value of the voltage generated in the magnification adjustment variable resistor. Therefore, even after the initialization of the gaming machine, the ball control means is fired from the launching means as compared with the gaming machine in which the voltage adjustment voltage obtaining means obtains the voltage value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor for magnification adjustment. The processing time can be increased by reducing the time spent controlling the firing intensity of the sphere.

  In the gaming machine 38, the magnification adjustment voltage acquisition means periodically acquires the voltage value of the voltage generated in the magnification adjustment variable resistor after the gaming machine is turned on. A gaming machine 40. The magnification adjustment voltage acquisition means periodically acquires the voltage value of the voltage generated in the magnification adjustment variable resistor after the game machine is turned on. Therefore, after turning on the power of the gaming machine, the resistance of the variable resistor for magnification adjustment is adjusted to adjust the launch strength of the ball while checking the launch strength of the ball launched from the launch means by operating the operation member. be able to.

  In any one of the gaming machines 31 to 33 and 36 to 40, the second value set by the set value means is configured to be adjustable as a voltage value of a DC voltage, and the set value means has a resistance value. Adjustable voltage adjusting variable resistor, voltage adjusting power supply means for supplying a DC voltage to the voltage adjusting variable resistor, and the voltage adjusting variable resistor by the DC voltage supplied by the voltage adjusting power supply means And a voltage adjusting means for adjusting a voltage value of the DC voltage as the second value based on a voltage value of the voltage generated in the game machine 41. The second value set by the setting value means is configured to be adjustable as a voltage value of a DC voltage, and the voltage adjusting means is generated in the voltage adjusting variable resistor by the DC voltage supplied from the voltage adjusting power supply means. Based on the voltage value of the set voltage, the voltage value of the DC voltage as the second value set by the setting value means is adjusted. Therefore, the second value set by the set value means can be easily adjusted by adjusting the resistance value of the voltage adjusting variable resistor.

  In the gaming machine 41, the voltage adjusting means is configured to be capable of adjusting the voltage value of the DC voltage as the second value to be positive or negative. Since the voltage adjustment means is configured to be able to adjust the voltage value of the DC voltage as the second value to be positive or negative, the second value synthesized by the synthesis value means can be positive or negative. Therefore, by adjusting the voltage value of the DC voltage as the second value synthesized by the synthesized value means, the adjustment to increase the launch intensity of the sphere without changing the amount of change in the launch intensity of the sphere launched from the launch means or Adjustments can be made to lower.

  In the gaming machine 41 or 42, the voltage adjustment means includes an adjustment voltage acquisition means for acquiring a voltage value of a voltage generated in the voltage adjustment variable resistor, and a voltage value acquired by the adjustment voltage acquisition means. A gaming machine 43, comprising: adjustment voltage determining means for determining a voltage value of the DC voltage as the second value based on the above. When the adjustment voltage acquisition means acquires the voltage value of the voltage generated in the voltage adjustment variable resistor, the adjustment voltage determination means is set by the setting value means based on the acquired voltage value of the voltage. The voltage value of the DC voltage as a binary value is determined. Therefore, the adjustment voltage determining means can accurately determine the voltage value of the DC voltage as the second value.

  In the gaming machine 43, the adjusting voltage acquisition means acquires the voltage value of the voltage generated in the voltage adjusting variable resistor at the time of initialization of the gaming machine. The adjustment voltage acquisition means acquires the voltage value of the voltage generated in the voltage adjustment variable resistor when the gaming machine is initialized. Therefore, after the game machine is initialized, the adjustment voltage acquisition unit does not need to acquire the voltage value of the voltage generated in the voltage adjustment variable resistor. Therefore, even after the initialization of the gaming machine, the ball control means is fired from the launching means as compared with the gaming machine that obtains the voltage value of the voltage generated by the adjusting voltage obtaining means in the voltage adjusting variable resistor. The processing time can be increased by reducing the time spent for controlling the firing intensity of the sphere.

  In the gaming machine 43, the adjustment voltage acquisition means periodically acquires the voltage value of the voltage generated in the voltage adjustment variable resistor after the gaming machine is turned on. Machine 45. The adjustment voltage acquisition means periodically acquires the voltage value of the voltage generated in the voltage adjustment variable resistor after the gaming machine is turned on. Therefore, after turning on the power of the gaming machine, adjust the resistance value of the variable resistor for voltage adjustment to adjust the firing strength of the ball while checking the firing strength of the ball launched from the launching means by operating the operation member. be able to.

  Based on a launching means for launching a sphere, an operating member, a first value changing means for changing a first value based on an operation amount of the operating member, and a first value changed by the first value changing means, In a gaming machine comprising a ball control means for controlling the firing intensity of a ball launched from the launching means, a second value serving as a reference is set separately from the first value changed by the first value changing means. The reference value setting means, the first value detecting means for detecting the first value changed by the first value changing means, and the first value detected by the first value detecting means are set by the reference value setting means. Output value switching means for outputting a third value larger than the first value instead of the first value when it is determined that the value is greater than or equal to the second value, and the ball control means comprises: , Based on the third value output by the output value switching means, Gaming machine 46, characterized in that the elevation means so as to control the radiation strength of the sphere to be fired.

  In the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2000-202094, the adjustment error of the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob occurs, the position where the solenoid pier collides with the sphere shifts, and the launch strength of the sphere is weakened. Even if the manipulated variable is set to the maximum value, it is not possible to hit the ball against, for example, the return rubber (see FIG. 2) arranged at the right end of the game area where the ball fired by the solenoid flows down, so that a normal game is performed. There was a problem that could not.

  According to the gaming machine 46, the first value changing means changes the first value based on the operation amount of the operating member, and the first value detecting means detects the changed first value. When the first value detected by the first value detection means is determined by the output value switching means to be greater than or equal to the second value set by the reference value setting means, the output value switching means Instead of the first value, a third value larger than the first value is output. The sphere control means controls the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the launching means based on the third value output by the output value switching means. Therefore, when the first value detected by the first value detection means is determined by the output value switching means to be greater than or greater than the second value set by the reference value setting means, the first value detection means is fired from the firing means. It is possible to reliably switch the firing intensity of the sphere to a predetermined intensity.

  In the gaming machine 46, the second value set by the reference value setting means is configured to be adjustable, and includes a value adjusting means for adjusting the second value. The second value set by the reference value setting means is configured to be adjustable, and the value adjusting means adjusts the second value. Therefore, the second value to be compared with the first value that changes based on the operation amount of the operation member can be adjusted by the value adjusting means.

  In the gaming machine 46 or 47, the third value output by the output value switching means is configured to be adjustable, and is provided with output value adjusting means for adjusting the third value. 48. The third value output by the output value switching means is configured to be adjustable, and the output value adjusting means adjusts the third value. Therefore, by adjusting the third value output from the output value switching means by the output value adjusting means, the first value detected by the first value detecting means is set by the reference value setting means by the output value switching means. When it is determined that it is greater than or equal to the second value, it is possible to adjust the firing intensity of the sphere launched from the launching means.

  In any one of the gaming machines 46 to 48, the game area where the ball launched by the launching means flows down and one of the game areas is provided, and the ball launched from the launching means is launched into the gaming area. A launcher and a ball stopper that can be hit by a ball launched from the launcher, and the third value is a value obtained by the ball launched from the launcher via the launcher reaching the ball stopper. A gaming machine 49, which is set so as to have a launch intensity. When the first value detected by the first value detection means is determined by the output value switching means to be greater than or equal to the second value set by the reference value setting means, the output value switching means A third value larger than the first value is output instead of the one value. Here, the third value is set so that the sphere launched from the launching means through the launching unit has a launch intensity that reaches the ball stopper. Therefore, when the first value detected by the first value detecting means is determined by the output value switching means to be greater than or greater than the second value set by the reference value setting means, the launching means switches from the launching means. The ball launched into the game area via the can be reliably applied to the ball stopper member, and normal game can be performed reliably.

  In the gaming machine 48 or 49, the gaming machine 50 is provided with value limiting means for limiting the upper limit value of the third value adjusted by the output value adjusting means. When the output value switching means determines that the first value detected by the first value detection means is greater than or equal to the second value set by the reference value setting means, the output value switching means Instead, the third value to be output is limited to the upper limit value by the value limiting means. Therefore, when the third value is restricted by the value restricting means, the upper limit value of the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means is constant even if the operation amount of the operating member is increased. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent damage to the ball stopper member or the like that the ball launched from the launching unit hits.

  In the gaming machine 50, the launching unit controls the firing strength of the ball to be launched based on the voltage value of the applied voltage, and the upper limit value limited by the value limiting unit is applied to the launching unit. The voltage value as the upper limit value to be limited is set to be less than the voltage value of the absolute maximum rating of the launching means. Machine 51. When the first value detected by the first value detection means is determined by the output value switching means to be greater than or greater than the second value set by the reference value setting means, the value limiting means outputs the output value. The third value output from the switching means is limited to the upper limit value. Here, the launching means controls the launch intensity of the sphere to launch based on the voltage value of the applied voltage, and the upper limit value that the value limiting means limits the third value is applied to the launching means. The voltage value is configured to be adjustable as the voltage value of the voltage, and the voltage value as the upper limit value to be limited is set to be less than the voltage value of the absolute maximum rating of the launching means. Therefore, when the first value detected by the first value detection means is determined by the output value switching means to be greater than or equal to the second value set by the reference value setting means, it is applied to the firing means. Since it is possible to prevent the voltage from exceeding the absolute maximum rating, damage to the launching means can be prevented.

In any one of the gaming machines 46 to 51, the first value changing means includes at least a first voltage dividing means having at least a variable resistor that changes a resistance value based on an operation amount of the operation member, and the first voltage dividing means. DC voltage supply means for supplying a DC voltage to the means,
A gaming machine 52 characterized in that a voltage value generated in the variable resistor by a DC voltage supplied by the DC voltage supply means is the first value. Since the DC voltage is supplied from the DC voltage supply means to the first voltage dividing means, when the resistance value of the variable resistor changes based on the operation amount of the operation member, the voltage value generated in the variable resistor changes. . The voltage value that changes based on the operation amount of the operation member is set as a first value that is changed by the first value changing means. Therefore, the first value changing means can be realized with a simple configuration.

  In any one of the gaming machines 46 to 51, a setting value means for setting a fourth value is provided separately from the first value changed by the first value changing means, and the output value switching means is configured to detect the first value. When the first value detected by the means is determined to be less than or less than the second value set by the reference value setting means, the first value changing means sets the first value to be changed by the setting value means. And a synthesized value means for synthesizing and outputting the fourth value, and the sphere control means controls the firing intensity of the sphere emitted from the launching means based on the value synthesized by the synthesized value means. A gaming machine 53 characterized by that. Setting value means for setting the fourth value, and the output value switching means determines whether the first value detected by the first value detection means is less than the second value set by the reference value setting means by the output value switching means. A composite value means for combining and outputting the first value changed by the first value changing means and the fourth value set by the set value means when determined to be less than that is provided. Therefore, until the first value detected by the first value detection means becomes larger than or equal to the second value set by the reference value setting means, the composite value means changes based on the operation amount of the operation member. Since the fourth value is combined with the first value, the fourth value set by the setting value means is added to the first value that changes based on the operation amount of the operating member, in addition to the firing intensity of the sphere emitted from the launching means. Can also be changed.

  In the gaming machine 53, the first value changing means includes a first voltage dividing means having at least a variable resistor that changes a resistance value based on an operation amount of the operation member, and a DC voltage is applied to the first voltage dividing means. DC voltage supply means for supplying, the combined value means, the voltage value generated in the variable resistor by the DC voltage supplied by the DC voltage supply means as the first value, the first value as the first value A gaming machine 54 characterized by being combined with a fourth value set by a setting value means. Since the DC voltage is supplied from the DC voltage supply means to the first voltage dividing means, when the resistance value of the variable resistor changes based on the operation amount of the operation member, the voltage value generated in the variable resistor changes. . The synthesized value means synthesizes a voltage value that changes based on the operation amount of the operating member as a first value and a fourth value set by the set value means. Here, generally, synthesis of voltage values can be realized with a simple configuration. Therefore, since the first value synthesized by the synthesized value means can be a voltage value, the synthesized value means can synthesize the first value with the fourth value with a simple configuration.

  The gaming machine 53 or 54 includes conversion value means for multiplying the value synthesized by the synthesis value means by a positive real number, and the ball control means is based on the value multiplied by the positive real number by the conversion value means, A gaming machine 55 characterized by controlling the firing intensity of a ball fired from the launching means. The sphere control means controls the firing intensity of the sphere emitted from the launching means based on a value obtained by multiplying the value synthesized by the synthesis value means by a positive real number by the conversion value means. Here, the conversion value means can change the amount of change of the synthesized value that varies depending on the operation amount of the operation member by multiplying the value synthesized by the synthesis value means by a positive real number. Therefore, it is possible to change the amount of change in the launch intensity of the sphere that changes depending on the amount of operation of the operation member.

  In any one of the gaming machines 46 to 51, the output value switching means determines that the first value detected by the first value detecting means is less than or less than the second value set by the reference value setting means. In this case, a conversion value means for outputting the first value changed by the first value changing means by multiplying it by a positive real number is output, and the ball control means is based on a value multiplied by a positive real number by the conversion value means. And a game machine 56 for controlling the firing intensity of a ball fired from the launching means. The output value switching means detects the first value when the first value detected by the first value detection means is less than or less than the second value set by the reference value setting means by the output value switching means. Conversion value means for outputting the first value changed by the changing means by multiplying it by a positive real number is provided. Here, since the conversion value means multiplies the first value that changes according to the operation amount of the operation member by a positive real number, the change amount of the first value can be changed. Therefore, until the first value detected by the first value detecting means is greater than or equal to the second value set by the reference value setting means, the conversion value means causes the sphere to change according to the operation amount of the operating member. The amount of change in launch intensity can be changed.

  In the gaming machine 56, the first value changing means includes a first voltage dividing means having at least a variable resistor that changes a resistance value based on an operation amount of the operating member, and a DC voltage is applied to the first voltage dividing means. A DC voltage supply means for supplying the conversion value means, wherein the voltage value generated in the variable resistor by the DC voltage supplied by the DC voltage supply means is the first value, and the first value is positive. A gaming machine 57 characterized by being multiplied by a real number. Since the DC voltage is supplied from the DC voltage supply means to the first voltage dividing means, when the resistance value of the variable resistor changes based on the operation amount of the operation member, the voltage value generated in the variable resistor changes. . The conversion value means sets the voltage value that changes based on the operation amount of the operation member as the first value that the first value change means changes, and multiplies the first value by a positive real number. Here, generally, multiplying the voltage value by a positive real number can be realized with a simple configuration. Therefore, since the first value converted by the conversion value means can be a voltage value, the conversion value means can convert the first value with a simple configuration.

  In the gaming machine 56 or 57, apart from the first value changed by the first value changing means, a setting value means for setting a fourth value, a fourth value set by the setting value means, and the converted value means And a synthesized value means for synthesizing and outputting a value obtained by multiplying the first value by a positive real number, and the sphere control means is based on the value synthesized by the synthesized value means from the launching means. A gaming machine 58 characterized by controlling the firing intensity of a ball to be fired. The firing intensity of the sphere fired from the launching means is controlled based on the value synthesized by the synthesized value means. Therefore, the synthesized value means synthesizes the fourth value into a value obtained by multiplying the first value by a positive real number by the converted value means and changing the amount of change of the first value. The firing intensity can be changed by the fourth value set by the setting value means in addition to the value obtained by changing the amount of change of the first value by the conversion value means.

  In any of the gaming machines 55 to 58, the magnification at which the conversion value means is multiplied by a positive real number is configured to be adjustable as a voltage value of a DC voltage, and the conversion value means is a magnification at which a resistance value can be adjusted. An adjustment variable resistor, a magnification adjustment power supply means for supplying a DC voltage to the magnification adjustment variable resistor, and a DC voltage supplied by the magnification adjustment power supply means generated in the magnification adjustment variable resistor A gaming machine 59, comprising: a magnification adjusting means for adjusting a voltage value of a DC voltage as a magnification for multiplying the positive real number based on a voltage value of the voltage. The magnification by which the conversion value means is multiplied by a positive real number is configured to be adjustable as a DC voltage value. The magnification adjustment means is generated in the variable resistor for magnification adjustment by the DC voltage supplied from the power supply means for magnification adjustment. Based on the voltage value of the applied voltage, the conversion value means adjusts the magnification by which the positive real number is multiplied. Therefore, by adjusting the resistance value of the variable resistor for magnification adjustment, it is possible to easily adjust the magnification at which the conversion value means multiplies the positive real number.

  In the gaming machine 59, the magnification adjustment means includes a magnification adjustment voltage acquisition means for acquiring a voltage value of the voltage generated in the magnification adjustment variable resistor, and a voltage value acquired by the magnification adjustment voltage acquisition means. A gaming machine 60, comprising: a magnification adjustment voltage determining means for determining a voltage value of a DC voltage as a magnification for multiplying the positive real number. When the magnification adjustment voltage acquisition means acquires the voltage value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor for magnification adjustment, the conversion value means determines that the conversion value means is positive based on the acquired voltage value of the voltage. The voltage value of the DC voltage as a magnification that is multiplied by a real number is determined. Therefore, the voltage adjustment means for magnification adjustment can accurately determine the voltage value of the DC voltage as the magnification that the conversion value means multiplies to a positive real number.

  In the gaming machine 60, the voltage adjustment means for magnification adjustment acquires the voltage value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor for magnification adjustment at the time of initialization of the gaming machine 61. . The magnification adjustment voltage acquisition means acquires the voltage value of the voltage generated in the magnification adjustment variable resistor when the gaming machine is initialized. Therefore, after initialization of the gaming machine, the magnification adjustment voltage acquisition means does not need to acquire the voltage value of the voltage generated in the magnification adjustment variable resistor. Therefore, even after the initialization of the gaming machine, the ball control means is fired from the launching means as compared with the gaming machine in which the voltage adjustment voltage obtaining means obtains the voltage value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor for magnification adjustment. The processing time can be increased by reducing the time spent controlling the firing intensity of the sphere.

  In the gaming machine 60, the voltage adjustment means for magnification adjustment acquires the voltage value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor for magnification adjustment periodically after the gaming machine is turned on. Gaming machine 62. The magnification adjustment voltage acquisition means periodically acquires the voltage value of the voltage generated in the magnification adjustment variable resistor after the game machine is turned on. Therefore, after turning on the power of the gaming machine, the resistance of the variable resistor for magnification adjustment is adjusted to adjust the launch strength of the ball while checking the launch strength of the ball launched from the launch means by operating the operation member. be able to.

  In any one of the gaming machines 53 to 55 and 58 to 62, the fourth value set by the set value means is configured to be adjustable as a voltage value of a DC voltage, and the set value means has a resistance value. Adjustable voltage adjusting variable resistor, voltage adjusting power supply means for supplying a DC voltage to the voltage adjusting variable resistor, and the voltage adjusting variable resistor by the DC voltage supplied by the voltage adjusting power supply means A gaming machine 63, comprising: voltage adjusting means for adjusting the voltage value of the DC voltage as the fourth value based on the voltage value of the voltage generated in the above. The fourth value set by the setting value means can be adjusted as a voltage value of a DC voltage, and the voltage adjusting means is generated in the voltage adjusting variable resistor by the DC voltage supplied from the voltage adjusting power supply means. Based on the voltage value of the set voltage, the voltage value of the DC voltage as the fourth value set by the setting value means is adjusted. Therefore, the fourth value set by the set value means can be easily adjusted by adjusting the resistance value of the voltage adjusting variable resistor.

  In the gaming machine 63, the voltage adjusting means is configured to be capable of adjusting the voltage value of the DC voltage as the fourth value to be positive or negative. Since the voltage adjusting means is configured to be able to adjust the voltage value of the DC voltage as the fourth value to be positive or negative, the fourth value synthesized by the synthesized value means can be positive or negative. Therefore, by adjusting the voltage value of the DC voltage as the fourth value synthesized by the synthesized value means, the adjustment to increase the launch intensity of the sphere without changing the amount of change in the launch intensity of the sphere launched from the launch means or Adjustments can be made to lower.

  In the gaming machine 63 or 64, the voltage adjustment means includes an adjustment voltage acquisition means for acquiring a voltage value of the voltage generated in the voltage adjustment variable resistor, and a voltage value acquired by the adjustment voltage acquisition means. A gaming machine 65, comprising: an adjustment voltage determining means for determining a voltage value of a DC voltage as the fourth value based on the above. When the adjustment voltage acquisition means acquires the voltage value of the voltage generated in the voltage adjustment variable resistor, the adjustment voltage determination means is set by the setting value means based on the acquired voltage value of the voltage. The voltage value of the DC voltage as four values is determined. Therefore, the adjustment voltage determining means can accurately determine the voltage value of the DC voltage as the fourth value.

  In the gaming machine 65, the adjusting voltage acquisition means acquires the voltage value of the voltage generated in the voltage adjusting variable resistor at the time of initialization of the gaming machine. The adjustment voltage acquisition means acquires the voltage value of the voltage generated in the voltage adjustment variable resistor when the gaming machine is initialized. Therefore, after the game machine is initialized, the adjustment voltage acquisition unit does not need to acquire the voltage value of the voltage generated in the voltage adjustment variable resistor. Therefore, even after the initialization of the gaming machine, the ball control means is fired from the launching means as compared with the gaming machine that obtains the voltage value of the voltage generated by the adjusting voltage obtaining means in the voltage adjusting variable resistor. The processing time can be increased by reducing the time spent for controlling the firing intensity of the sphere.

  In the gaming machine 65, the adjustment voltage acquisition means periodically acquires the voltage value of the voltage generated in the voltage adjustment variable resistor after the gaming machine is turned on. Machine 67. The adjustment voltage acquisition means periodically acquires the voltage value of the voltage generated in the voltage adjustment variable resistor after the gaming machine is turned on. Therefore, after turning on the power of the gaming machine, adjust the resistance value of the variable resistor for voltage adjustment to adjust the firing strength of the ball while checking the firing strength of the ball launched from the launching means by operating the operation member. be able to.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines )
51 Operation handle (operation member )
142 firing solenoid (launching means )
303 Adder circuit (combining means )
308 Voltage booster ( part of first voltage output means )
310 second voltage supply unit (control hand stage)
DC1 DC power supply (first DC voltage supply means)
Reg1 variable shunt regulator (part of reference voltage output means )
VR1 variable resistor (first variable resistor, a portion of the first division means)
VR2 variable resistor (electrostatic pressure pressing means)

Claims (1)

An operation member;
First voltage dividing means having at least a first variable resistor that changes a resistance value based on an operation amount of the operation member ;
In a gaming machine comprising a first DC voltage supply means for supplying a DC voltage to the first voltage dividing means and generating a voltage based on the resistance of the first variable resistor in the first variable resistor.
Unlike the first DC voltage supply means, reference voltage output means for outputting a reference voltage;
The reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means and the voltage generated in the first variable resistor are respectively input, and the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is output by the reference voltage output means. A first voltage output means for outputting a predetermined DC voltage when the reference voltage is greater than the reference voltage or greater than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means;
Voltage dividing means for dividing the voltage generated in the first variable resistor;
Combining means for combining the voltage divided by the voltage dividing means and the voltage output by the first voltage output means;
A gaming machine comprising: control means for controlling the firing intensity of a ball launched from the launching means based on the output voltage output from the synthesizing means .

Images